]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blob - gcc/doc/tm.texi.in
poly_int: add poly-int.h
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / doc / tm.texi.in
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
25
26 @menu
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
56 * Misc:: Everything else.
57 @end menu
58
59 @node Target Structure
60 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
61 @cindex target hooks
62 @cindex target functions
63
64 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
65 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
66 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
67 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
68 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
69 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
70 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
71 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
72 @smallexample
73 #include "target.h"
74 #include "target-def.h"
75
76 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
77
78 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
79 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
80
81 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
82 @end smallexample
83 @end deftypevar
84
85 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
86 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
87 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
88 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
89 @code{targetm} structure.
90
91 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
92 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
93 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
94 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
95 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
96 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
97 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
98
99 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
100 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
101 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
102 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
103 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
104 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
105 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
106 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
107 default definition is used.
108
109 @node Driver
110 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
111 @cindex driver
112 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
113
114 @c prevent bad page break with this line
115 You can control the compilation driver.
116
117 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
118 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
119 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
120
121 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
122 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
123 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
124 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
125 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
126 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
127
128 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
129 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
130 that the other specs are easier to write.
131
132 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
133 @end defmac
134
135 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
136 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
137 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
138 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
139 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
140
141 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
142 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
143 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
144 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
145 everywhere it occurs.
146
147 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
148 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
149 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
150
151 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
152 @end defmac
153
154 @defmac CPP_SPEC
155 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
156 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
157 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
158
159 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
160 @end defmac
161
162 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
163 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
164 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
165 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
166 @end defmac
167
168 @defmac CC1_SPEC
169 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
170 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
171 front ends.
172 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
173 for GCC to pass to front ends.
174
175 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
176 @end defmac
177
178 @defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
179 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
180 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
181 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
182
183 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
184 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
185 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
186 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
187 @end defmac
188
189 @defmac ASM_SPEC
190 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
191 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
192 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
193 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
194
195 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
196 @end defmac
197
198 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
200 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
201 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
202 an example of this.
203
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
205 @end defmac
206
207 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
208 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
209 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
210 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
211 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
212 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
213
214 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
215 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
216 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
217 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
218 @end defmac
219
220 @defmac LINK_SPEC
221 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
222 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
223 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
224
225 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
226 @end defmac
227
228 @defmac LIB_SPEC
229 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
230 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
231 command given to the linker.
232
233 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
234 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
235 @end defmac
236
237 @defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
238 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
239 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
240 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
241 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
242
243 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
244 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
245 @end defmac
246
247 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
248 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
249 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
250 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
251 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
252 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
253 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
254 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
255 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
256 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
257 @end defmac
258
259 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
260 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
261 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
262 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
263 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
264 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
265 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
266 @end defmac
267
268 @defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
269 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
270 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
271 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
272 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
273 @end defmac
274
275 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
276 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
277 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
278 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
279
280 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
281 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
282 @end defmac
283
284 @defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very end of the command given to the linker.
288
289 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
290 @end defmac
291
292 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
293 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
294 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
295 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
296 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
297 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
298 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
299 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
300 @end defmac
301
302 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
303 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
304 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
305 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
306 @end defmac
307
308 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
309 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
310 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
311 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
312 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
313 @end defmac
314
315 @defmac EXTRA_SPECS
316 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
317 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
318 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
319
320 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
321 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
322 string constant that provides the specification.
323
324 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
325
326 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
327 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
328 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
329 these definitions.
330
331 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
332 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
333 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
334 used.
335
336 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
337
338 @smallexample
339 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
340 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
341
342 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
343 @end smallexample
344
345 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
346 @smallexample
347 #undef CPP_SPEC
348 #define CPP_SPEC \
349 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
350 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
351 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
352 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
353
354 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
355 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
356 @end smallexample
357
358 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
359 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
360
361 @smallexample
362 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
363 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
364 @end smallexample
365 @end defmac
366
367 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
368 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
369 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
370 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
371 @end defmac
372
373 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
374 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
375 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
376 @end defmac
377
378 @defmac POST_LINK_SPEC
379 Define this macro to add additional steps to be executed after linker.
380 The default value of this macro is empty string.
381 @end defmac
382
383 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
384 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
385 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
386 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
387 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
388 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
389 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
390 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
391 @end defmac
392
393 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
394
395 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
396 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
397 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
398 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
399 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
400
401 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
402 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
403 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
404 @xref{Target Fragment}.
405 @end defmac
406
407 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
408 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
409 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
410 indicates an absolute file name.
411 @end defmac
412
413 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
414 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
415 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
416 when the compiler is built as a cross
417 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
418 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.ac}.
419 @end defmac
420
421 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
422 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
423 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
424 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
425 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
426 is built as a cross compiler.
427 @end defmac
428
429 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
430 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
431 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
432 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
433 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
434 is built as a cross compiler.
435 @end defmac
436
437 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
438 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
439 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
440 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
441 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
442 is built as a cross compiler.
443 @end defmac
444
445 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
446 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
447 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
448 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
449 @end defmac
450
451 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
452 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
453 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
454 cross compiler.
455 @end defmac
456
457 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
458 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
459 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
460 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
461 initialize the necessary environment variables.
462 @end defmac
463
464 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
465 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
466 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
467 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
468 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
469 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
470
471 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
472 replacement.
473 @end defmac
474
475 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
476 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
477 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
478 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
479 @end defmac
480
481 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
482 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
483 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
484 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
485 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
486 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
487 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
488 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
489 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
490
491 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
492 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
493 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
494 for C++-only directories,
495 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
496 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
497 the array with a null element.
498
499 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
500 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
501 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
502 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
503
504 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
505
506 @smallexample
507 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
508 @{ \
509 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
510 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
511 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
512 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
513 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
514 @}
515 @end smallexample
516 @end defmac
517
518 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
519
520 @enumerate
521 @item
522 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
523
524 @item
525 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
526 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
527 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
528
529 @item
530 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
531
532 @item
533 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
534 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
535
536 @item
537 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
538
539 @item
540 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
541
542 @item
543 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
544 compiler.
545 @end enumerate
546
547 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
548
549 @enumerate
550 @item
551 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
552
553 @item
554 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
555 value based on the installed toolchain location.
556
557 @item
558 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
559 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
560
561 @item
562 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
563 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
564
565 @item
566 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
567
568 @item
569 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
570 compiler.
571
572 @item
573 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
574 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
575
576 @item
577 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
578 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
579
580 @item
581 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
582 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
583 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
584
585 @item
586 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
587 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
588 @file{/lib/}.
589
590 @item
591 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
592 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
593 @file{/usr/lib/}.
594 @end enumerate
595
596 @node Run-time Target
597 @section Run-time Target Specification
598 @cindex run-time target specification
599 @cindex predefined macros
600 @cindex target specifications
601
602 @c prevent bad page break with this line
603 Here are run-time target specifications.
604
605 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
606 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
607 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
608 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
609 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
610 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
611 finished command line option processing your code can use those
612 results freely.
613
614 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
615 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
616 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
617 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
618
619 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
620 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
621 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
622 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
623 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
624 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
625 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
626 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
627 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
628 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
629
630 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
631 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
632 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
633 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
634 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
635 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
636 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
637 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
638 preprocessing.
639 @end defmac
640
641 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
642 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
643 and is used for the target operating system instead.
644 @end defmac
645
646 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
647 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
648 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
649 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
650 it yourself.
651 @end defmac
652
653 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
654 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
655 any target-specific headers.
656 @end deftypevar
657
658 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
659 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
660 Its default setting is 0.
661 @end deftypevr
662
663 @cindex optional hardware or system features
664 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
665
666 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
667 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
668 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
669 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
670 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
671 definition does nothing but return true.
672
673 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
674 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
675 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
676 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
677 via attributes).
678 @end deftypefn
679
680 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
681 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
682 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
683 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
684 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
685 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
686 default definition does nothing but return false.
687
688 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
689 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
690 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
691 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
692 @end deftypefn
693
694 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
695
696 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
697
698 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
699
700 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
701
702 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
703
704 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
705
706 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
707 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
708 but is only used in the C
709 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
710 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
711 frontends.
712 @end defmac
713
714 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
715 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
716 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
717 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
718 options are processed once
719 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
720 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
721 options passed explicitly.
722
723 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
724 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
725 @code{optimize} attribute.
726 @end deftypevr
727
728 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
729
730 @hook TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS
731
732 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
733 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
734 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
735 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
736 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
737 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
738
739 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
740 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
741 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
742 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
743 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
744 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
745 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
746
747 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
748 is 0.
749 @end defmac
750
751 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
752
753 @node Per-Function Data
754 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
755 @cindex per-function data
756 @cindex data structures
757
758 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
759 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
760 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
761 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
762 when another one comes along.
763
764 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
765 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
766 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
767 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
768 to their own specific data.
769
770 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
771 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
772 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
773 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
774
775 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
776 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
777 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
778 function, for level 0.
779
780 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
781 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
782 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
783 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
784 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
785 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
786 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
787 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
788 longer supported.
789
790 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
791 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
792 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
793 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
794 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
795 @end defmac
796
797 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
798 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
799 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
800 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
801 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
802 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
803
804 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
805 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
806 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
807 @end deftypevar
808
809 @node Storage Layout
810 @section Storage Layout
811 @cindex storage layout
812
813 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
814 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
815 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
816 @xref{Run-time Target}.
817
818 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
819 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
820 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
821 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
822 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
823 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
824 macro need not be a constant.
825
826 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
827 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
828 @end defmac
829
830 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
831 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
832 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
833 @end defmac
834
835 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
836 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
837 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
838 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
839 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
840 macro need not be a constant.
841 @end defmac
842
843 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
844 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
845 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
846 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
847 the order of words in memory.
848 @end defmac
849
850 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
851 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
852 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
853 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
854 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
855
856 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
857 multi-word integers.
858 @end defmac
859
860 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
861 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
862 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
863 @end defmac
864
865 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
866 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
867 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
868 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
869 @end defmac
870
871 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
872 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
873 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
874 @end defmac
875
876 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
877 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
878 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
879 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
880 @end defmac
881
882 @defmac POINTER_SIZE
883 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
884 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
885 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
886 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
887 @end defmac
888
889 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
890 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
891 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
892 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
893 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
894 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
895 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
896
897 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
898 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
899 @end defmac
900
901 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
902 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
903 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
904 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
905 scalar type.
906
907 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
908 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
909 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
910 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
911 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
912 counterparts.
913
914 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
915 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
916 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
917 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
918 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
919 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
920
921 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
922 @end defmac
923
924 @hook TARGET_C_EXCESS_PRECISION
925
926 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
927
928 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
929 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
930 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
931 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
932 size of an integer.
933 @end defmac
934
935 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
936 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
937 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
938 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
939 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
940 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
941 @end defmac
942
943 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
944 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
945 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
946 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
947 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
948 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
949 @end defmac
950
951 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
952 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
953 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
954 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
955 @end defmac
956
957 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
958 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
959 @end defmac
960
961 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
962 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
963 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
964 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
965 @end defmac
966
967 @hook TARGET_ABSOLUTE_BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
968
969 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
970 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
971 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
972 @end defmac
973
974 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
975 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
976 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
977 @end defmac
978
979 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
980 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
981 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
982 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
983 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
984 @end defmac
985
986 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
987 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
988 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
989 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
990 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
991 @end defmac
992
993 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{type}, @var{computed})
994 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} of
995 type @var{type} if the alignment computed in the usual way (including
996 applying of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
997 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
998 field alignment has not been set by the
999 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. Note that @var{field}
1000 may be @code{NULL_TREE} in case we just query for the minimum alignment
1001 of a field of type @var{type} in structure context.
1002 @end defmac
1003
1004 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
1005 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
1006 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
1007
1008 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1009
1010 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1011 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1012 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1013 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1014 @end defmac
1015
1016 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1017 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1018 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1019 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
1020 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1021
1022 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1023 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1024 a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1025 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1026 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1027 @end defmac
1028
1029 @hook TARGET_STATIC_RTX_ALIGNMENT
1030
1031 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1032 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1033 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1034 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1035 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1036
1037 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1038
1039 @findex strcpy
1040 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1041 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1042 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1043 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1044 @end defmac
1045
1046 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1047 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1048 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1049 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1050 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1051
1052 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1053 @end defmac
1054
1055 @hook TARGET_CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
1056
1057 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1058 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1059 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1060 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1061 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1062
1063 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1064
1065 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1066 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1067
1068 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1069 @end defmac
1070
1071 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1072
1073 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1074 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1075 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1076 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1077 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1078 align the slot.
1079
1080 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1081 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1082 be used.
1083
1084 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1085 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1086
1087 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1088 @end defmac
1089
1090 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1091 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1092 variable @var{decl}.
1093
1094 If this macro is not defined, then
1095 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1096 is used.
1097
1098 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1099 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1100
1101 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1102 @end defmac
1103
1104 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1105 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1106 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1107 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1108
1109 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1110 @end defmac
1111
1112 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1113 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1114 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1115
1116 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1117 @end defmac
1118
1119 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1120 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1121 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1122
1123 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1124 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1125 @end defmac
1126
1127 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1128 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1129 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1130 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1131 @end defmac
1132
1133 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1134 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1135 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1136
1137 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1138 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1139 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1140 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1141 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1142
1143 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1144 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1145 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1146 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1147
1148 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1149 structure.
1150
1151 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1152 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1153
1154 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1155 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1156 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1157 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1158
1159 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1160 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1161 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1162
1163 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1164 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1165 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1166
1167 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1168 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1169 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1170
1171 @smallexample
1172 struct foo1
1173 @{
1174 char x;
1175 char :0;
1176 char y;
1177 @};
1178
1179 struct foo2
1180 @{
1181 char x;
1182 int :0;
1183 char y;
1184 @};
1185
1186 main ()
1187 @{
1188 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1189 sizeof (struct foo1));
1190 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1191 sizeof (struct foo2));
1192 exit (0);
1193 @}
1194 @end smallexample
1195
1196 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1197 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1198 @end defmac
1199
1200 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1201 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1202 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1203 @end defmac
1204
1205 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1206
1207 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1208
1209 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1210
1211 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1212 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1213 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1214 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1215 @var{specified}.
1216
1217 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1218 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1219 @end defmac
1220
1221 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1222 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1223 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1224 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1225 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1226 (DImode)} is assumed.
1227 @end defmac
1228
1229 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1230 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1231 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1232 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1233 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1234 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1235 having its mode specified.
1236
1237 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1238 would most commonly define this macro if the
1239 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1240 64-bit mode.
1241 @end defmac
1242
1243 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1244 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1245 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1246 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1247
1248 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1249 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1250 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1251 @end defmac
1252
1253 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1254
1255 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1256
1257 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1258
1259 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1260
1261 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1262
1263 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1264
1265 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1266
1267 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1268
1269 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1270
1271 @node Type Layout
1272 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1273
1274 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1275 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1276 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1277 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1278
1279 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1280 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1281 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1282 @end defmac
1283
1284 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1285 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1286 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1287 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1288 unit.)
1289 @end defmac
1290
1291 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1292 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1293 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1294 @end defmac
1295
1296 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1297 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1298 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1299 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1300 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1301 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1302 @end defmac
1303
1304 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1305 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1306 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1307 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1308 macro must be at least 64.
1309 @end defmac
1310
1311 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1312 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1313 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1314 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1315 @end defmac
1316
1317 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1318 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1319 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1320 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1321 @end defmac
1322
1323 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1324 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1325 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1326 @end defmac
1327
1328 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1329 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1330 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1331 words.
1332 @end defmac
1333
1334 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1335 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1336 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1337 words.
1338 @end defmac
1339
1340 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1341 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1342 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1343 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1344 @end defmac
1345
1346 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1347 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1348 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1349 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1350 @end defmac
1351
1352 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1353 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1354 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1355 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1356 @end defmac
1357
1358 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1359 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1360 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1361 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1362 @end defmac
1363
1364 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1365 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1366 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1367 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1368 @end defmac
1369
1370 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1371 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1372 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1373 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1374 @end defmac
1375
1376 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1377 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1378 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1379 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1380 @end defmac
1381
1382 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1383 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1384 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1385 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1386 @end defmac
1387
1388 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1389 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1390 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1391 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1392 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1393 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1394 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1395 @end defmac
1396
1397 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1398 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1399 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1400 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1401 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1402 is the default.
1403 @end defmac
1404
1405 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1406 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1407 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1408 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1409 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1410 @end defmac
1411
1412 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1413
1414 @defmac SIZE_TYPE
1415 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1416 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1417 contents of the string.
1418
1419 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1420 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1421 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1422 of the data type names defined in the function
1423 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1424 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1425 compiler to crash on startup.
1426
1427 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1428 int"}.
1429 @end defmac
1430
1431 @defmac SIZETYPE
1432 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1433 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1434 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1435 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1436 is extracted.
1437
1438 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1439
1440 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1441 @end defmac
1442
1443 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1444 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1445 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1446 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1447 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1448
1449 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1450 @end defmac
1451
1452 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1453 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1454 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1455 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1456 information.
1457
1458 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1459 @end defmac
1460
1461 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1462 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1463 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1464 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1465 @end defmac
1466
1467 @defmac WINT_TYPE
1468 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1469 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1470 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1471 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1472 information.
1473
1474 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1475 @end defmac
1476
1477 @defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1478 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1479 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1480 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1481 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1482
1483 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1484 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1485 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1486 @end defmac
1487
1488 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1489 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1490 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1491 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1492 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1493
1494 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1495 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1496 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1497 int}.
1498 @end defmac
1499
1500 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1501 @defmacx INT8_TYPE
1502 @defmacx INT16_TYPE
1503 @defmacx INT32_TYPE
1504 @defmacx INT64_TYPE
1505 @defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1506 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1507 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1508 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1509 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1510 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1511 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1512 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1513 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1514 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1515 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1516 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1517 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1518 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1519 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1520 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1521 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1522 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1523 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1524 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1525 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1526 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1527 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1528 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1529 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1530 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1531 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1532 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1533 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1534 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1535 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1536 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1537
1538 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1539 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1540 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1541 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1542 these macros are null pointers.
1543 @end defmac
1544
1545 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1546 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1547 that looks like:
1548
1549 @smallexample
1550 struct @{
1551 union @{
1552 void (*fn)();
1553 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1554 @};
1555 ptrdiff_t delta;
1556 @};
1557 @end smallexample
1558
1559 @noindent
1560 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1561 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1562 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1563 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1564 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1565 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1566 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1567 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1568
1569 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1570 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1571 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1572 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1573 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1574 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1575 architecture, you should define this macro to
1576 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1577
1578 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1579 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1580 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1581 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1582 @end defmac
1583
1584 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1585 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1586 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1587 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1588 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1589 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1590 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1591
1592 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1593 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1594 @end defmac
1595
1596 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1597 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1598 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1599 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1600 when special alignment is necessary. */
1601 @end defmac
1602
1603 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1604 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1605 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1606 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1607 of words in each data entry.
1608 @end defmac
1609
1610 @node Registers
1611 @section Register Usage
1612 @cindex register usage
1613
1614 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1615 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1616
1617 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1618 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1619 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1620 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1621 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1622
1623 @menu
1624 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1625 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1626 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1627 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1628 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1629 @end menu
1630
1631 @node Register Basics
1632 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1633
1634 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1635 Registers have various characteristics.
1636
1637 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1638 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1639 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1640 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1641 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1642 @end defmac
1643
1644 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1645 @cindex fixed register
1646 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1647 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1648 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1649 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1650 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1651 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1652 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1653
1654 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1655 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1656 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1657
1658 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1659 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1660 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1661 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1662 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1663 @end defmac
1664
1665 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1666 @cindex call-used register
1667 @cindex call-clobbered register
1668 @cindex call-saved register
1669 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1670 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1671 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1672 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1673 function calls.
1674
1675 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1676 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1677 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1678 @end defmac
1679
1680 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1681 @cindex call-used register
1682 @cindex call-clobbered register
1683 @cindex call-saved register
1684 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1685 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1686 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1687 This macro is optional. If not specified, it defaults to the value
1688 of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1689 @end defmac
1690
1691 @cindex call-used register
1692 @cindex call-clobbered register
1693 @cindex call-saved register
1694 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED
1695
1696 @findex fixed_regs
1697 @findex call_used_regs
1698 @findex global_regs
1699 @findex reg_names
1700 @findex reg_class_contents
1701 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1702
1703 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1704 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1705 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1706 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1707 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1708 outbound register.
1709 @end defmac
1710
1711 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1712 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1713 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1714 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1715 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1716 register.
1717 @end defmac
1718
1719 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1720 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1721 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1722 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1723 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1724 gotos.
1725 @end defmac
1726
1727 @defmac PC_REGNUM
1728 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1729 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1730 @end defmac
1731
1732 @node Allocation Order
1733 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1734 @cindex order of register allocation
1735 @cindex register allocation order
1736
1737 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1738 Registers are allocated in order.
1739
1740 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1741 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1742 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1743 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1744
1745 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1746 (all else being equal).
1747
1748 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1749 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1750 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1751 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1752 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1753 @end defmac
1754
1755 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1756 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1757 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1758
1759 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1760 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1761 register; and so on.
1762
1763 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1764 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1765
1766 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1767 @end defmac
1768
1769 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1770 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1771 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1772 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1773 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1774 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1775 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1776 @end defmac
1777
1778 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1779 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1780 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1781 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1782 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1783 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1784 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1785 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1786
1787 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1788 @end defmac
1789
1790 @node Values in Registers
1791 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1792
1793 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1794 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1795 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1796
1797 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1798
1799 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1800 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1801 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1802 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1803 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1804 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1805 @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1806
1807 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1808 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1809 nonzero.
1810
1811 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1812 @code{subreg_get_info}
1813 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1814 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1815 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1816 registers and so not be representable.
1817 @end defmac
1818
1819 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1820 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1821 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1822 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1823 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1824 @end defmac
1825
1826 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1827 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1828 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1829 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1830 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1831 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1832 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1833 @end defmac
1834
1835 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1836
1837 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1838 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1839 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1840
1841 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1842 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1843 handler.
1844
1845 The default is always nonzero.
1846 @end defmac
1847
1848 @hook TARGET_MODES_TIEABLE_P
1849
1850 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1851
1852 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1853 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1854 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1855 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1856 @end defmac
1857
1858 @node Leaf Functions
1859 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1860
1861 @cindex leaf functions
1862 @cindex functions, leaf
1863 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1864 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1865 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1866 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1867 normally arrive.
1868
1869 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1870 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1871 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1872 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1873 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1874 functions''.
1875
1876 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1877 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1878 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1879 accomplish this.
1880
1881 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1882 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1883 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1884 function treatment.
1885
1886 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1887 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1888 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1889 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1890 in this vector.
1891
1892 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1893 the treatment of leaf functions.
1894 @end defmac
1895
1896 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1897 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1898 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1899
1900 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1901 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
1902 will cause the compiler to abort.
1903
1904 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1905 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1906 this.
1907 @end defmac
1908
1909 @findex current_function_is_leaf
1910 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
1911 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
1912 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
1913 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
1914 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
1915 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
1916 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
1917 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
1918 functions which only use leaf registers.
1919 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
1920 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
1921 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
1922 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1923 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1924
1925 @node Stack Registers
1926 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1927
1928 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1929 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
1930 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
1931 stack.
1932
1933 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1934 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
1935 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
1936 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
1937 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
1938 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
1939 with it, as well as defining these macros.
1940
1941 @defmac STACK_REGS
1942 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1943 @end defmac
1944
1945 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
1946 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
1947 the machine has any stack-like registers.
1948 @end defmac
1949
1950 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
1951 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1952 of the stack.
1953 @end defmac
1954
1955 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
1956 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1957 the stack.
1958 @end defmac
1959
1960 @node Register Classes
1961 @section Register Classes
1962 @cindex register class definitions
1963 @cindex class definitions, register
1964
1965 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1966 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1967 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1968 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1969
1970 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1971 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1972 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1973
1974 @findex ALL_REGS
1975 @findex NO_REGS
1976 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1977 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1978 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1979 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1980
1981 @findex GENERAL_REGS
1982 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1983 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1984 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1985 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1986 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
1987
1988 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
1989 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
1990
1991 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
1992 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
1993 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
1994 them in operand constraints.
1995
1996 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
1997 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
1998 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
1999 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2000 (@pxref{Costs}).
2001
2002 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2003 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2004 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2005 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2006 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2007 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2008 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2009
2010 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2011 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2012 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2013 in their union.
2014
2015 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2016 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2017 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2018 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2019 specify this requirement is with @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2020
2021 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2022 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2023 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2024 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2025 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2026 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2027 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2028 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2029 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2030
2031 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2032 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2033 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2034 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2035 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2036 tells how many classes there are.
2037
2038 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2039 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2040 in many of the tables described below.
2041 @end deftp
2042
2043 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2044 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2045
2046 @smallexample
2047 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2048 @end smallexample
2049 @end defmac
2050
2051 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2052 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2053 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2054 @end defmac
2055
2056 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2057 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2058 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2059 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2060 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2061
2062 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2063 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2064 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2065 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2066 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2067 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2068 so on.
2069 @end defmac
2070
2071 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2072 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2073 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2074 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2075 register.
2076 @end defmac
2077
2078 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2079 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2080 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2081 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2082 @end defmac
2083
2084 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2085 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2086 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2087 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2088 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2089 @end defmac
2090
2091 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2092 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2093 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2094 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2095 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2096 @end defmac
2097
2098 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2099 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2100 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2101 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2102 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2103 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2104 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2105 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2106 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2107 @end defmac
2108
2109 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2110 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2111 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2112 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2113 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2114 @end defmac
2115
2116 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2117 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2118 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2119 @end defmac
2120
2121 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2122 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2123 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2124 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2125 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2126 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2127 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2128 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2129 @code{address_operand}.
2130 @end defmac
2131
2132 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2133 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2134 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2135 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2136 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2137 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2138 than other base register uses.
2139
2140 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2141 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2142 @end defmac
2143
2144 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2145 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2146 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2147 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2148 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2149 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2150 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2151 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2152 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2153 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2154 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2155 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2156 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2157 @end defmac
2158
2159 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2160 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2161 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2162 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2163 allocated such a hard register.
2164
2165 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2166 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2167 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2168 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2169 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2170 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2171 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2172 only if neither labeling works.
2173 @end defmac
2174
2175 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2176
2177 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2178
2179 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2180 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2181 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2182 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2183 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2184 safe:
2185
2186 @smallexample
2187 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2188 @end smallexample
2189
2190 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2191 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2192 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2193 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2194 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2195
2196 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2197 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2198 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2199 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2200 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2201 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2202 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2203 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant cannot be loaded
2204 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2205 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2206 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2207
2208 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2209 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2210 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2211 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2212 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2213 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2214 @end defmac
2215
2216 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2217
2218 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2219 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2220 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2221 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2222 ordinarily be used.
2223
2224 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2225 there are certain modes that simply cannot go in certain reload classes.
2226
2227 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2228 smaller class.
2229
2230 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2231 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2232 @end defmac
2233
2234 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2235
2236 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2237 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2238 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2239 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2240 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2241
2242 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2243 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2244 reload phase that it may
2245 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2246 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2247 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2248 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2249 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2250 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2251
2252 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2253 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2254 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2255 class required. If the
2256 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2257 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2258 macros identically.
2259
2260 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2261 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2262 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2263 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2264 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2265
2266 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2267 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2268 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2269 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2270 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2271 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2272 register.
2273
2274 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2275 register that
2276 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2277 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2278 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2279 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2280 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2281
2282 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2283 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2284 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2285 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2286
2287 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2288 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2289 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2290 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2291 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2292 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2293 general registers.
2294 @end defmac
2295
2296 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
2297
2298 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2299 Normally when @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2300 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2301 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2302 defined by this macro.
2303
2304 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2305 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2306 @end defmac
2307
2308 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
2309
2310 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2311
2312 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2313
2314 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2315 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2316 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2317
2318 This is closely related to the macro @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2319 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2320 should be the maximum value of @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2321 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2322
2323 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2324 in the reload pass.
2325 @end defmac
2326
2327 @hook TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
2328
2329 @hook TARGET_IRA_CHANGE_PSEUDO_ALLOCNO_CLASS
2330
2331 @hook TARGET_LRA_P
2332
2333 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2334
2335 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2336
2337 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2338
2339 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV_P
2340
2341 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS_DISPLACEMENT
2342
2343 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2344
2345 @hook TARGET_ADDITIONAL_ALLOCNO_CLASS_P
2346
2347 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2348
2349 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_PRESSURE_CLASSES
2350
2351 @node Stack and Calling
2352 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2353 @cindex calling conventions
2354
2355 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2356 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2357
2358 @menu
2359 * Frame Layout::
2360 * Exception Handling::
2361 * Stack Checking::
2362 * Frame Registers::
2363 * Elimination::
2364 * Stack Arguments::
2365 * Register Arguments::
2366 * Scalar Return::
2367 * Aggregate Return::
2368 * Caller Saves::
2369 * Function Entry::
2370 * Profiling::
2371 * Tail Calls::
2372 * Shrink-wrapping separate components::
2373 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2374 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2375 @end menu
2376
2377 @node Frame Layout
2378 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2379 @cindex stack frame layout
2380 @cindex frame layout
2381
2382 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2383 Here is the basic stack layout.
2384
2385 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2386 Define this macro to be true if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2387 pointer to a smaller address, and false otherwise.
2388 @end defmac
2389
2390 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2391 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2392 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2393 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2394
2395 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2396 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2397 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2398 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2399 space for the next item on the stack.
2400
2401 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2402 true, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2403 which is often wrong.
2404 @end defmac
2405
2406 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2407 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2408 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2409 @end defmac
2410
2411 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2412 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2413 addresses on the stack.
2414 @end defmac
2415
2416 @hook TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2417
2418 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2419 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2420 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2421
2422 On ports where @code{TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2423 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2424 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2425 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2426 @end defmac
2427
2428 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2429 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2430 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2431 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2432
2433 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2434 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2435 @end defmac
2436
2437 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2438 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2439 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2440 function.
2441
2442 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2443 the first argument's address.
2444 @end defmac
2445
2446 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2447 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2448 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2449
2450 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2451 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2452 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2453 @end defmac
2454
2455 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2456 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2457 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2458 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2459 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2460 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2461 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2462 @end defmac
2463
2464 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2465 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2466 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2467 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2468 itself.
2469
2470 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2471 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2472 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2473 @end defmac
2474
2475 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2476 A C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2477 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2478 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2479 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2480 define this macro. The default is to do nothing.
2481 @end defmac
2482
2483 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2484
2485 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2486 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2487 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2488 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2489 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2490 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2491 @end defmac
2492
2493 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2494 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2495 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2496 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2497 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2498 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is nonzero.
2499
2500 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2501 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2502 determine the return address of other frames.
2503 @end defmac
2504
2505 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2506 Define this macro to nonzero value if the return address of a particular
2507 stack frame is accessed from the frame pointer of the previous stack
2508 frame. The zero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2509 @end defmac
2510
2511 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2512 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2513 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2514 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2515 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2516 the stack.
2517
2518 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2519 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2520
2521 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2522 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2523 @end defmac
2524
2525 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2526 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2527 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2528 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2529 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2530
2531 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2532 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2533 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2534 over time.
2535 @end defmac
2536
2537 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2538 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2539 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2540 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2541 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2542 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2543 @end defmac
2544
2545 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2546
2547 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2548 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2549 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2550 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2551 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2552 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2553
2554 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2555 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2556 @end defmac
2557
2558 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2559 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2560 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2561 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2562 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2563 during virtual register instantiation.
2564
2565 The default value for this macro is
2566 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2567 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2568 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2569 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2570 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2571
2572 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2573 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2574 DWARF 2.
2575 @end defmac
2576
2577 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2578 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2579 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2580 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2581 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2582
2583 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2584 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2585 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2586 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2587 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2588 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2589 should be defined.
2590 @end defmac
2591
2592 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2593 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2594 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2595 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2596 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2597 @end defmac
2598
2599 @node Exception Handling
2600 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2601 @cindex exception handling
2602
2603 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2604 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2605 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2606 @var{N} registers are usable.
2607
2608 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2609 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2610 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2611 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2612 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2613
2614 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2615 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2616 @end defmac
2617
2618 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2619 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2620 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2621 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2622 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2623
2624 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2625 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2626
2627 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2628 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2629 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2630 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2631 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2632 that provided by DWARF 2.
2633 @end defmac
2634
2635 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2636 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2637 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2638 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2639
2640 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2641 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2642 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2643 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2644 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2645 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2646 target call frame.
2647
2648 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2649 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2650 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2651
2652 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2653 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2654 @end defmac
2655
2656 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2657 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2658 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2659 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2660 using it to return to the exception handler.
2661 @end defmac
2662
2663 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2664 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2665 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2666 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2667 and so may be read-only.
2668
2669 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2670 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2671 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2672 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2673
2674 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2675 represented directly.
2676 @end defmac
2677
2678 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2679 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2680 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2681 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2682 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2683
2684 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2685 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2686 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2687 to be emitted.
2688 @end defmac
2689
2690 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2691 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2692 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2693 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2694 through signal frames.
2695
2696 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2697 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2698 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2699 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2700 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2701 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2702 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2703 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2704 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2705
2706 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2707 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2708 @end defmac
2709
2710 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2711 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2712 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2713 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2714
2715 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2716 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2717 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2718 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2719 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2720 be updated in @var{fs}.
2721 @end defmac
2722
2723 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2724 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2725 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2726 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2727 @end defmac
2728
2729 @node Stack Checking
2730 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2731
2732 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2733 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2734 three ways:
2735
2736 @enumerate
2737 @item
2738 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2739 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2740 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2741 other special processing.
2742
2743 @item
2744 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2745 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2746 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2747 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2748 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2749 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2750 approach below.
2751
2752 @item
2753 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2754 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2755 @end enumerate
2756
2757 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2758 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2759 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2760 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2761
2762 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2763 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2764 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2765 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2766 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2767 value of this macro is zero.
2768 @end defmac
2769
2770 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2771 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2772 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2773 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2774 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2775 @end defmac
2776
2777 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2778 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2779 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2780 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2781 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2782 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2783 @end defmac
2784
2785 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2786 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2787 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2788 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2789 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2790 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2791 default value of this macro is zero.
2792 @end defmac
2793
2794 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2795 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2796 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 4KB/8KB
2797 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2798 8KB/12KB with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for most
2799 architectures and operating systems.
2800 @end defmac
2801
2802 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2803 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2804 in the opposite case.
2805
2806 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2807 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2808 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2809 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2810 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2811 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2812 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2813 @end defmac
2814
2815 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2816 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2817 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2818 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2819 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2820 use the default of four words.
2821 @end defmac
2822
2823 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2824 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2825 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2826 @option{-fstack-check}.
2827 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2828 normally not need to override that default.
2829 @end defmac
2830
2831 @hook TARGET_STACK_CLASH_PROTECTION_FINAL_DYNAMIC_PROBE
2832
2833 @need 2000
2834 @node Frame Registers
2835 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2836
2837 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2838 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2839
2840 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2841 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2842 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2843 the hardware determines which register this is.
2844 @end defmac
2845
2846 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2847 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2848 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2849 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2850 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2851 @end defmac
2852
2853 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2854 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2855 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2856 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2857 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2858 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2859 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2860 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2861 used for the frame pointer.
2862
2863 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2864 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2865 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2866 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2867 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2868 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2869 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2870
2871 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2872 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2873 @end defmac
2874
2875 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2876 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2877 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2878 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2879 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2880 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2881 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2882 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2883 (@pxref{Elimination}).
2884 @end defmac
2885
2886 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
2887 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
2888 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
2889 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2890 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
2891 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
2892 @end defmac
2893
2894 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
2895 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
2896 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
2897 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
2898 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
2899 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
2900 @end defmac
2901
2902 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2903 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2904 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2905 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2906 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2907 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2908 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2909
2910 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2911 address from the stack.
2912 @end defmac
2913
2914 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2915 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2916 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2917 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2918 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2919 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2920 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2921 not be defined.
2922
2923 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2924
2925 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2926 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
2927 @end defmac
2928
2929 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
2930
2931 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
2932 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
2933 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
2934 DWARF2 exception handling.
2935
2936 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
2937 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
2938 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
2939 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
2940 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
2941 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
2942 registers that are not call-saved.
2943
2944 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
2945 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
2946 @end defmac
2947
2948 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
2949
2950 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
2951 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
2952
2953 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
2954 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
2955 @end defmac
2956
2957 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
2958
2959 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
2960 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
2961 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
2962 column number to use instead.
2963 @end defmac
2964
2965 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
2966
2967 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
2968 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
2969 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
2970 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
2971 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
2972
2973 @end defmac
2974
2975 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
2976
2977 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
2978 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
2979 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
2980 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
2981 return @code{@var{regno}}.
2982
2983 @end defmac
2984
2985 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
2986
2987 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
2988 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
2989 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
2990 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
2991
2992 @end defmac
2993
2994 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
2995
2996 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
2997 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
2998 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
2999 defined and 0 otherwise.
3000
3001 @end defmac
3002
3003 @node Elimination
3004 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3005
3006 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3007 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3008
3009 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3010
3011 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3012 This macro specifies a table of register pairs used to eliminate
3013 unneeded registers that point into the stack frame.
3014
3015 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3016 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3017
3018 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3019 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3020 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3021 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3022 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3023
3024 In this case, you might specify:
3025 @smallexample
3026 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3027 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3028 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3029 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3030 @end smallexample
3031
3032 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3033 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3034 @end defmac
3035
3036 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3037
3038 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3039 This macro returns the initial difference between the specified pair
3040 of registers. The value would be computed from information
3041 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3042 registers @code{df_regs_ever_live_p} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3043 @end defmac
3044
3045 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_FRAME_LAYOUT
3046
3047 @node Stack Arguments
3048 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3049 @cindex arguments on stack
3050 @cindex stack arguments
3051
3052 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3053 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3054 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3055
3056 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3057
3058 @defmac PUSH_ARGS
3059 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3060 outgoing arguments.
3061 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3062 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3063 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3064 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3065 @end defmac
3066
3067 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3068 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3069 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3070 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3071 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3072 @end defmac
3073
3074 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3075 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3076 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3077
3078 On some machines, the definition
3079
3080 @smallexample
3081 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3082 @end smallexample
3083
3084 @noindent
3085 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3086 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3087 alignment. Then the definition should be
3088
3089 @smallexample
3090 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3091 @end smallexample
3092
3093 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3094 @end defmac
3095
3096 @findex outgoing_args_size
3097 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3098 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3099 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3100 will be computed and placed into
3101 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3102 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3103 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3104
3105 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3106 is not proper.
3107 @end defmac
3108
3109 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3110 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3111 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3112 registers.
3113
3114 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3115 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3116 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3117 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3118 of the function.
3119
3120 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3121 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3122 which.
3123 @end defmac
3124 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3125 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3126
3127 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3128 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3129 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3130 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3131 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3132 @end defmac
3133
3134 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3135 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3136 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3137 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3138 if the function called is a library function.
3139
3140 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3141 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3142 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3143 @end defmac
3144
3145 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3146 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3147 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3148 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3149 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3150
3151 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3152 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3153 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3154 stack in its natural location.
3155 @end defmac
3156
3157 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3158
3159 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3160 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3161 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3162 when compiling a function call.
3163
3164 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3165 have been accumulated.
3166
3167 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3168 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3169 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3170 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3171 appropriate.
3172 @end defmac
3173
3174 @node Register Arguments
3175 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3176 @cindex arguments in registers
3177 @cindex registers arguments
3178
3179 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3180 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3181 the stack.
3182
3183 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3184
3185 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3186
3187 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3188
3189 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3190
3191 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3192
3193 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3194
3195 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3196
3197 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3198
3199 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3200 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3201 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3202 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3203 of bytes of argument so far.
3204
3205 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3206 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3207 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3208 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3209 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3210 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3211 @end defmac
3212
3213 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3214 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3215 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3216 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3217 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3218 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3219 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3220 @end defmac
3221
3222 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3223 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3224 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3225 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3226 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3227 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3228 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3229 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3230 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3231 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3232 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3233 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3234 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3235
3236 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3237 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3238 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3239 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3240 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3241 never both of them at once.
3242 @end defmac
3243
3244 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3245 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3246 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3247 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3248 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3249 0)} is used instead.
3250 @end defmac
3251
3252 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3253 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3254 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3255 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3256
3257 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3258 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3259 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3260 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3261 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3262 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3263 @end defmac
3264
3265 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3266
3267 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET
3268
3269 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
3270
3271 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3272 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3273 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3274 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3275 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3276 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3277 @end defmac
3278
3279 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3280 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3281 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3282 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3283 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3284 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3285 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3286 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3287 required.
3288 @end defmac
3289
3290 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3291
3292 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3293
3294 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3295 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3296 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3297 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3298 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3299 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3300 stack.
3301 @end defmac
3302
3303 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3304
3305 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3306
3307 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3308
3309 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3310
3311 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3312
3313 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3314
3315 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3316
3317 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3318
3319 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3320
3321 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3322
3323 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3324
3325 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3326
3327 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_MODE
3328
3329 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_BUILTIN_P
3330
3331 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3332
3333 @node Scalar Return
3334 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3335 @cindex return values in registers
3336 @cindex values, returned by functions
3337 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3338
3339 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3340 values---values that can fit in registers.
3341
3342 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3343
3344 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3345 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3346 a new target instead.
3347 @end defmac
3348
3349 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3350 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3351 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3352
3353 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3354 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3355 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3356 compiled.
3357 @end defmac
3358
3359 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3360
3361 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3362 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3363 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3364
3365 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3366 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3367 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3368 suffices:
3369
3370 @smallexample
3371 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3372 @end smallexample
3373
3374 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3375 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3376 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3377
3378 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3379 for a new target instead.
3380 @end defmac
3381
3382 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3383
3384 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3385 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3386 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3387 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3388 @end defmac
3389
3390 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3391
3392 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3393
3394 @node Aggregate Return
3395 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3396 @cindex aggregates as return values
3397 @cindex large return values
3398 @cindex returning aggregate values
3399 @cindex structure value address
3400
3401 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3402 cases), the value is not returned according to
3403 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3404 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3405 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3406 address}.
3407
3408 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3409 memory.
3410
3411 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3412
3413 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3414 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3415 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3416 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3417 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3418 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3419 target hook.
3420
3421 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3422 @end defmac
3423
3424 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3425
3426 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3427 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3428 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3429 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3430
3431 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3432 pass an address to the subroutine.
3433
3434 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3435 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3436 @end defmac
3437
3438 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3439
3440 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3441
3442 @hook TARGET_EMPTY_RECORD_P
3443
3444 @hook TARGET_WARN_PARAMETER_PASSING_ABI
3445
3446 @node Caller Saves
3447 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3448
3449 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3450 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3451 must live across calls.
3452
3453 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3454 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3455 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3456 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3457 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3458 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3459 @end defmac
3460
3461 @node Function Entry
3462 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3463 @cindex function entry and exit
3464 @cindex prologue
3465 @cindex epilogue
3466
3467 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3468 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3469
3470 @hook TARGET_ASM_PRINT_PATCHABLE_FUNCTION_ENTRY
3471
3472 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3473
3474 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3475
3476 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3477
3478 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3479
3480 @itemize @bullet
3481 @item
3482 @findex pretend_args_size
3483 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3484 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3485 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3486 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3487 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3488 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3489 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3490 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3491 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3492 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3493
3494 @item
3495 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3496 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3497 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3498 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3499 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3500 a save area.
3501
3502 @item
3503 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3504 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3505 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3506 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3507
3508 @item
3509 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3510 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3511 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3512 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3513 @end itemize
3514
3515 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3516 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3517 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3518 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3519 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3520 default is 0.
3521
3522 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3523 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3524 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3525 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3526 @end defmac
3527
3528 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3529 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3530 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3531 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3532 @end defmac
3533
3534 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3535 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3536 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3537 on entry to an exception edge.
3538 @end defmac
3539
3540 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3541
3542 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3543
3544 @node Profiling
3545 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3546 @cindex profiling, code generation
3547
3548 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3549
3550 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3551 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3552 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3553
3554 @findex mcount
3555 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3556 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3557 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3558 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3559
3560 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3561 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3562 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3563 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3564 @end defmac
3565
3566 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3567 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3568 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3569 not support profiling.
3570 @end defmac
3571
3572 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3573 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3574 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3575 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3576 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3577 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3578 @end defmac
3579
3580 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3581 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3582 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3583 @end defmac
3584
3585 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3586
3587 @node Tail Calls
3588 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3589 @cindex tail calls
3590
3591 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3592
3593 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3594
3595 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3596
3597 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3598
3599 @node Shrink-wrapping separate components
3600 @subsection Shrink-wrapping separate components
3601 @cindex shrink-wrapping separate components
3602
3603 The prologue may perform a variety of target dependent tasks such as
3604 saving callee-saved registers, saving the return address, aligning the
3605 stack, creating a stack frame, initializing the PIC register, setting
3606 up the static chain, etc.
3607
3608 On some targets some of these tasks may be independent of others and
3609 thus may be shrink-wrapped separately. These independent tasks are
3610 referred to as components and are handled generically by the target
3611 independent parts of GCC.
3612
3613 Using the following hooks those prologue or epilogue components can be
3614 shrink-wrapped separately, so that the initialization (and possibly
3615 teardown) those components do is not done as frequently on execution
3616 paths where this would unnecessary.
3617
3618 What exactly those components are is up to the target code; the generic
3619 code treats them abstractly, as a bit in an @code{sbitmap}. These
3620 @code{sbitmap}s are allocated by the @code{shrink_wrap.get_separate_components}
3621 and @code{shrink_wrap.components_for_bb} hooks, and deallocated by the
3622 generic code.
3623
3624 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_GET_SEPARATE_COMPONENTS
3625
3626 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_COMPONENTS_FOR_BB
3627
3628 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_DISQUALIFY_COMPONENTS
3629
3630 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_PROLOGUE_COMPONENTS
3631
3632 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_EPILOGUE_COMPONENTS
3633
3634 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_SET_HANDLED_COMPONENTS
3635
3636 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3637 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3638 @cindex stack smashing protection
3639
3640 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3641
3642 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3643
3644 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_RUNTIME_ENABLED_P
3645
3646 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3647
3648 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3649 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3650 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3651
3652 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3653
3654 @node Varargs
3655 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3656 @cindex varargs implementation
3657
3658 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3659 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3660 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3661 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3662 conditionals to include it.
3663
3664 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3665 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3666 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3667 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3668 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3669 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3670
3671 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3672 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3673 below.
3674
3675 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3676 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3677 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3678 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3679 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3680
3681 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3682 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3683 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3684 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3685
3686 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3687 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3688 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3689 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3690 to use them for its own purposes.
3691 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3692 @c 10feb93
3693 @end defmac
3694
3695 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3696 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3697 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3698 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3699 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3700 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3701 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3702 of the current function.
3703 @end defmac
3704
3705 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3706 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3707 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3708 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3709 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3710 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3711
3712 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3713 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3714 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3715
3716 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3717 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3718 @end defmac
3719
3720 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3721
3722 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3723
3724 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3725
3726 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3727
3728 @hook TARGET_CALL_ARGS
3729
3730 @hook TARGET_END_CALL_ARGS
3731
3732 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3733
3734 @hook TARGET_LOAD_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3735
3736 @hook TARGET_STORE_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3737
3738 @hook TARGET_LOAD_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3739
3740 @hook TARGET_STORE_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3741
3742 @hook TARGET_CHKP_FUNCTION_VALUE_BOUNDS
3743
3744 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARG_BOUNDS
3745
3746 @node Trampolines
3747 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3748 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3749 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3750
3751 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3752 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3753 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3754 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3755 trampoline.
3756
3757 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3758 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3759 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3760 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3761 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3762 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3763 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3764 operands.
3765
3766 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3767 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3768 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3769 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3770 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3771 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3772 separately.
3773
3774 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3775
3776 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3777 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3778 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3779 @end defmac
3780
3781 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3782 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3783 @end defmac
3784
3785 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3786 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3787
3788 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3789 is used for aligning trampolines.
3790 @end defmac
3791
3792 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3793
3794 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3795
3796 @hook TARGET_CUSTOM_FUNCTION_DESCRIPTORS
3797
3798 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3799 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3800 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3801 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3802
3803 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3804 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3805 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3806 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3807 latter makes initialization faster.
3808
3809 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3810 the following macro.
3811
3812 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3813 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3814 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3815 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3816 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
3817 @end defmac
3818
3819 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3820 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3821 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3822 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3823 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3824
3825 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3826 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3827 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3828 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
3829 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3830
3831 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3832 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3833 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3834 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3835 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3836 special assembler code.
3837 @end defmac
3838
3839 @node Library Calls
3840 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3841 @cindex library subroutine names
3842 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3843
3844 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3845 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3846
3847 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
3848 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
3849 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
3850 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
3851 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
3852 @end defmac
3853
3854 @findex set_optab_libfunc
3855 @findex init_one_libfunc
3856 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
3857
3858 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
3859
3860 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
3861 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
3862 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
3863 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
3864 return a tristate.
3865
3866 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
3867 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
3868 don't need to define this macro.
3869 @end defmac
3870
3871 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
3872 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
3873 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
3874 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
3875 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
3876 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
3877 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
3878 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
3879 @end defmac
3880
3881 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
3882 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
3883 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
3884 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
3885 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
3886 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
3887 @end defmac
3888
3889 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
3890 @findex matherr
3891 @defmac TARGET_EDOM
3892 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
3893 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
3894 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
3895 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
3896 system.
3897
3898 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
3899 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
3900 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
3901 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
3902 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
3903 @end defmac
3904
3905 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
3906 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
3907 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
3908 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
3909 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
3910 macro, a reasonable default is used.
3911 @end defmac
3912
3913 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
3914
3915 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
3916 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
3917 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
3918 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
3919 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
3920 the NeXT runtime installed.
3921
3922 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
3923 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
3924 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
3925
3926 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
3927 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
3928 @end defmac
3929
3930 @node Addressing Modes
3931 @section Addressing Modes
3932 @cindex addressing modes
3933
3934 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3935 This is about addressing modes.
3936
3937 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
3938 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
3939 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
3940 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
3941 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
3942 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
3943 @end defmac
3944
3945 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
3946 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
3947 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
3948 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
3949 the size of the memory operand.
3950 @end defmac
3951
3952 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
3953 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
3954 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
3955 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
3956 @end defmac
3957
3958 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
3959 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
3960 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
3961 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
3962 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
3963 constant addresses are supported.
3964 @end defmac
3965
3966 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
3967 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
3968 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
3969 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
3970 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
3971 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
3972 @end defmac
3973
3974 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
3975 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
3976 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
3977 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
3978 accept.
3979 @end defmac
3980
3981 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
3982
3983 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
3984 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
3985 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
3986 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
3987 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
3988 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
3989 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
3990 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
3991 @code{'m'} constraint.
3992 @end defmac
3993
3994 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
3995 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
3996 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
3997 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
3998 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
3999
4000 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4001 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4002
4003 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4004 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4005 @end defmac
4006
4007 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4008
4009 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4010 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4011 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4012 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4013 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4014 performance reasons.
4015
4016 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4017 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4018 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4019 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4020 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4021 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4022 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4023 be shared.
4024
4025 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4026 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4027 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4028 of reload internals.
4029
4030 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4031 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4032 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4033
4034 @findex push_reload
4035 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4036 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4037 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4038
4039 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4040 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4041 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4042 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4043 @code{push_reload}.
4044
4045 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4046 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4047 the address has become legitimate.
4048
4049 @findex copy_rtx
4050 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4051 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4052 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4053 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4054 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4055 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4056 @end defmac
4057
4058 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4059
4060 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4061
4062 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4063
4064 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4065
4066 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4067
4068 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4069
4070 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4071
4072 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4073
4074 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4075
4076 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4077
4078 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
4079
4080 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4081
4082 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST_OK
4083
4084 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION
4085
4086 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4087
4088 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MD_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4089
4090 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4091
4092 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4093
4094 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES
4095
4096 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_GET_MASK_MODE
4097
4098 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4099
4100 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4101
4102 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4103
4104 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4105
4106 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4107
4108 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_SCATTER
4109
4110 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4111
4112 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4113
4114 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4115
4116 @hook TARGET_SIMT_VF
4117
4118 @hook TARGET_GOACC_VALIDATE_DIMS
4119
4120 @hook TARGET_GOACC_DIM_LIMIT
4121
4122 @hook TARGET_GOACC_FORK_JOIN
4123
4124 @hook TARGET_GOACC_REDUCTION
4125
4126 @node Anchored Addresses
4127 @section Anchored Addresses
4128 @cindex anchored addresses
4129 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4130
4131 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4132 For example, if we have:
4133
4134 @smallexample
4135 static int a, b, c;
4136 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4137 @end smallexample
4138
4139 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4140 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4141 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4142 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4143 be something like:
4144
4145 @smallexample
4146 int foo (void)
4147 @{
4148 register int *xr = &x;
4149 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4150 @}
4151 @end smallexample
4152
4153 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4154 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4155
4156 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4157 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4158 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4159 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4160
4161 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4162
4163 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4164
4165 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4166
4167 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4168
4169 @node Condition Code
4170 @section Condition Code Status
4171 @cindex condition code status
4172
4173 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4174 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4175
4176 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4177 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4178 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4179 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4180 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4181 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4182 most RISC machines.
4183
4184 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4185 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4186 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4187 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4188 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4189 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4190
4191 These restrictions can prevent important
4192 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4193 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4194 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4195 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4196 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4197
4198 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4199 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4200 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4201 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4202 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4203 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4204 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4205
4206 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4207 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4208 interested in most macros in this section.
4209
4210 @menu
4211 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4212 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4213 @end menu
4214
4215 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4216 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4217 @findex cc0
4218
4219 @findex cc_status
4220 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4221 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4222 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4223 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4224 currently based, and several standard flags.
4225
4226 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4227 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4228 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4229
4230 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4231 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4232 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4233
4234 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4235 @end defmac
4236
4237 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4238 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4239 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4240 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4241 define this macro to initialize it.
4242
4243 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4244 @end defmac
4245
4246 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4247 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4248 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4249 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4250 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4251 set @code{(cc0)}.
4252
4253 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4254
4255 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4256 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4257 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4258 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4259 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4260 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4261 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4262 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4263 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4264 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4265 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4266 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4267 condition code value.
4268
4269 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4270 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4271 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4272 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4273 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4274 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4275 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4276
4277 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4278 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4279 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4280 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4281 @end defmac
4282
4283 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4284 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4285 @findex CCmode
4286 @findex MODE_CC
4287
4288 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4289 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4290 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4291 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4292 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4293 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4294 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4295 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4296 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4297 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
4298 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4299
4300 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4301 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4302 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4303 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4304 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4305 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4306 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4307
4308 @smallexample
4309 (define_insn ""
4310 [(set (reg:CCNZ 0)
4311 (compare:CCNZ
4312 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4313 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4314 (const_int 0)))]
4315 ""
4316 "@dots{}")
4317 @end smallexample
4318
4319 @noindent
4320 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CCNZmode}
4321 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4322
4323 @smallexample
4324 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4325 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4326 ? ((OP == LT || OP == LE || OP == GT || OP == GE) \
4327 ? CCFPEmode : CCFPmode) \
4328 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4329 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) \
4330 ? CCNZmode : CCmode))
4331 @end smallexample
4332
4333 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4334 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4335 this section.
4336
4337 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4338 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4339 @end defmac
4340
4341 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4342
4343 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4344 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4345 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4346 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4347 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4348
4349 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4350 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4351 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4352 inequality comparisons are given either @code{CCFPEmode} or @code{CCFPmode}:
4353
4354 @smallexample
4355 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) \
4356 ((MODE) != CCFPEmode && (MODE) != CCFPmode)
4357 @end smallexample
4358 @end defmac
4359
4360 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4361 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4362 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4363 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4364 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4365 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4366 freely convert unordered compares to ordered ones. Then definition may look
4367 like:
4368
4369 @smallexample
4370 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4371 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4372 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4373 @end smallexample
4374 @end defmac
4375
4376 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4377
4378 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4379
4380 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4381
4382 @node Costs
4383 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4384 @cindex costs of instructions
4385 @cindex relative costs
4386 @cindex speed of instructions
4387
4388 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4389 on the target machine.
4390
4391 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4392 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4393 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4394 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4395 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4396 that.
4397
4398 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4399 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4400 registers if they are not general registers.
4401
4402 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4403 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4404 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4405 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4406 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4407 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4408
4409 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4410 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4411 @end defmac
4412
4413 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4414
4415 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4416 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4417 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4418 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4419 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4420 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4421 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4422
4423 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4424 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4425 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4426 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4427 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4428 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4429
4430 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4431 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4432 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4433 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4434 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4435 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4436 are the same as to this macro.
4437
4438 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4439 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4440 @end defmac
4441
4442 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4443
4444 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4445 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4446 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4447 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4448 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4449 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4450 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4451 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4452 @end defmac
4453
4454 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4455 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4456 ordinarily expect.
4457
4458 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4459 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4460 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4461 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4462 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4463 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4464
4465 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4466 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4467 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4468 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4469 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4470 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4471 @end defmac
4472
4473 @hook TARGET_SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4474
4475 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4476 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4477 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4478 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4479 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4480
4481 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4482 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4483 the number of such sequences.
4484
4485 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4486 optimized for speed rather than size.
4487
4488 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4489 @end defmac
4490
4491 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4492
4493 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_BY_PIECES_BRANCH_RATIO
4494
4495 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4496 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4497 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4498 @end defmac
4499
4500 @defmac STORE_MAX_PIECES
4501 A C expression used by @code{store_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4502 a store used to memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}, or two times
4503 the size of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, whichever is smaller.
4504 @end defmac
4505
4506 @defmac COMPARE_MAX_PIECES
4507 A C expression used by @code{compare_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4508 a load or store used to compare memory is. Defaults to
4509 @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}.
4510 @end defmac
4511
4512 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4513 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4514 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4515 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4516 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4517
4518 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4519 optimized for speed rather than size.
4520
4521 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4522 @end defmac
4523
4524 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4525 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4526 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4527 a block set insn or a library call.
4528 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4529 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4530
4531 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4532 optimized for speed rather than size.
4533
4534 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4535 @end defmac
4536
4537 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4538 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4539 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4540 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4541 @end defmac
4542
4543 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4544 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4545 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4546 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4547 @end defmac
4548
4549 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4550 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4551 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4552 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4553 @end defmac
4554
4555 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4556 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4557 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4558 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4559 @end defmac
4560
4561 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4562 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4563 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4564 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4565 @end defmac
4566
4567 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4568 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4569 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4570 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4571 @end defmac
4572
4573 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4574 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4575 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4576 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4577 @end defmac
4578
4579 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4580 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4581 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4582 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4583 @end defmac
4584
4585 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4586 Define this macro to be true if it is as good or better to call a constant
4587 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4588 @end defmac
4589
4590 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4591 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4592 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4593 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4594 @end defmac
4595
4596 @hook TARGET_OPTAB_SUPPORTED_P
4597
4598 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4599
4600 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4601
4602 @hook TARGET_INSN_COST
4603
4604 @hook TARGET_MAX_NOCE_IFCVT_SEQ_COST
4605
4606 @hook TARGET_NOCE_CONVERSION_PROFITABLE_P
4607
4608 @hook TARGET_NO_SPECULATION_IN_DELAY_SLOTS_P
4609
4610 @hook TARGET_ESTIMATED_POLY_VALUE
4611
4612 @node Scheduling
4613 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4614
4615 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4616 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4617 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4618 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4619
4620 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4621
4622 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4623
4624 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4625
4626 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4627
4628 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4629
4630 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4631
4632 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4633
4634 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4635
4636 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4637
4638 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4639
4640 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4641
4642 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4643
4644 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4645
4646 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4647
4648 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4649
4650 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4651
4652 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4653
4654 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4655
4656 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4657
4658 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4659
4660 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4661
4662 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4663
4664 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4665
4666 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4667
4668 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4669
4670 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4671
4672 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4673
4674 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4675
4676 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4677
4678 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4679
4680 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4681
4682 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4683
4684 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4685
4686 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4687
4688 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4689
4690 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4691
4692 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4693
4694 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4695
4696 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4697
4698 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CAN_SPECULATE_INSN
4699
4700 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4701
4702 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4703
4704 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4705
4706 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4707
4708 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4709
4710 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FUSION_PRIORITY
4711
4712 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_DIVMOD_LIBFUNC
4713
4714 @node Sections
4715 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4716 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4717 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4718
4719 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4720 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4721 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4722 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4723 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4724 of sections.
4725
4726 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4727 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4728 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4729 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4730 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4731 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4732 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4733
4734 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4735 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4736 to be string literals.
4737
4738 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4739 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4740 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4741 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4742
4743 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4744 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4745 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4746 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4747 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4748 reuse @code{text_section}.
4749
4750 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4751 if the target does not provide them.
4752
4753 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4754 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4755 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4756 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4757 @end defmac
4758
4759 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4760 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4761 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4762 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4763 @end defmac
4764
4765 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4766 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4767 executed functions in the program.
4768 @end defmac
4769
4770 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4771 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4772 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4773 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4774 @end defmac
4775
4776 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4777 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4778 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4779 initialized, writable small data.
4780 @end defmac
4781
4782 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4783 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4784 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4785 data.
4786 @end defmac
4787
4788 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4789 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4790 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4791 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4792 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4793 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4794 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4795 used.
4796 @end defmac
4797
4798 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4799 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4800 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4801 uninitialized, writable small data.
4802 @end defmac
4803
4804 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4805 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4806 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4807 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4808 @end defmac
4809
4810 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4811 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4812 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4813 default is @code{'T'}.
4814 @end defmac
4815
4816 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4817 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4818 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4819 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4820 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
4821 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4822 @end defmac
4823
4824 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
4825 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4826 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4827 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4828 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
4829 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4830 @end defmac
4831
4832 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4833 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4834 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4835 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4836 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4837 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4838 @end defmac
4839
4840 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4841 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4842 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4843 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4844 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4845 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4846 @end defmac
4847
4848 @defmac MACH_DEP_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4849 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4850 containing the flag used to mark a machine-dependent section. This
4851 corresponds to the @code{SECTION_MACH_DEP} section flag.
4852 @end defmac
4853
4854 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
4855 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
4856 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
4857 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
4858 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
4859 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
4860 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
4861 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
4862 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
4863 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
4864 @end defmac
4865
4866 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
4867 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
4868 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
4869 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
4870 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
4871 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
4872 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
4873 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
4874 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
4875 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
4876 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
4877 @end defmac
4878
4879 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
4880 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
4881 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
4882 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
4883 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
4884 @end defmac
4885
4886 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4887 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
4888 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4889 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4890 readonly data section is used.
4891
4892 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4893 @end defmac
4894
4895 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
4896
4897 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
4898
4899 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
4900
4901 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
4902 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
4903 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
4904
4905 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
4906 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
4907 it is unlikely to be called.
4908 @end defmac
4909
4910 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
4911
4912 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
4913
4914 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
4915
4916 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
4917
4918 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
4919
4920 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
4921
4922 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
4923
4924 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
4925
4926 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
4927
4928 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
4929
4930 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
4931
4932 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
4933
4934 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
4935
4936
4937 @node PIC
4938 @section Position Independent Code
4939 @cindex position independent code
4940 @cindex PIC
4941
4942 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
4943 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
4944 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
4945 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
4946 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
4947 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
4948 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
4949 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
4950 relative addresses.
4951 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
4952 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
4953
4954 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
4955 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
4956 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
4957 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
4958 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
4959 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
4960 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
4961 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
4962 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
4963 @end defmac
4964
4965 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
4966 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
4967 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
4968 the default is zero. Do not define
4969 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
4970 @end defmac
4971
4972 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
4973 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
4974 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
4975 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
4976 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
4977 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
4978 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
4979 position independent code.
4980 @end defmac
4981
4982 @node Assembler Format
4983 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
4984
4985 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
4986 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
4987 instructions do.
4988
4989 @menu
4990 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
4991 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
4992 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
4993 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
4994 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
4995 and termination routines.
4996 * Macros for Initialization::
4997 Specific macros that control the handling of
4998 initialization and termination routines.
4999 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5000 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5001 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5002 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5003 @end menu
5004
5005 @node File Framework
5006 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5007 @cindex assembler format
5008 @cindex output of assembler code
5009
5010 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5011 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5012
5013 @findex default_file_start
5014 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5015
5016 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5017
5018 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5019
5020 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5021
5022 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5023 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5024 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5025 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5026 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5027 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5028 this function.
5029 @end deftypefun
5030
5031 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5032
5033 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5034
5035 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5036
5037 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5038 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5039 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5040 the end of the line.
5041 @end defmac
5042
5043 @defmac ASM_APP_ON
5044 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5045 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5046 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5047 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5048 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5049 @end defmac
5050
5051 @defmac ASM_APP_OFF
5052 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5053 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5054 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5055 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5056 @end defmac
5057
5058 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5059 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5060 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5061 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5062
5063 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5064 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5065 @end defmac
5066
5067 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5068
5069 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5070
5071 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5072 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5073 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5074 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5075 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5076 of the filename using this macro.
5077 @end defmac
5078
5079 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5080
5081 @hook TARGET_ASM_ELF_FLAGS_NUMERIC
5082
5083 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5084
5085 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5086
5087 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5088 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5089 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5090 @end deftypevr
5091
5092 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5093 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5094
5095 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5096
5097 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5098
5099 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5100
5101 @need 2000
5102 @node Data Output
5103 @subsection Output of Data
5104
5105
5106 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5107
5108 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5109
5110 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5111
5112 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5113
5114 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5115 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5116 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5117 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5118 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5119
5120 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5121 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5122 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5123 @end defmac
5124
5125 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5126 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5127 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5128 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5129 @end defmac
5130
5131 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5132 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5133 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5134 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5135 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5136 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5137 pool before the function.
5138 @end defmac
5139
5140 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5141 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5142 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5143 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5144 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5145 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5146 immediately after this call.
5147
5148 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5149 not be defined.
5150 @end defmac
5151
5152 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5153 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5154 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5155 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5156
5157 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5158 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5159 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5160 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5161 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5162 alignment.
5163
5164 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5165 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5166 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5167 Here is how to do this:
5168
5169 @smallexample
5170 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5171 @end smallexample
5172
5173 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5174 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5175 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5176
5177 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5178 @end defmac
5179
5180 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5181 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5182 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5183 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5184 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5185 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5186
5187 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5188 define this macro.
5189 @end defmac
5190
5191 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5192 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5193 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5194 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5195 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5196
5197 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5198 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5199 @end defmac
5200
5201 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5202
5203 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5204 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5205
5206 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5207 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5208 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5209 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5210 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5211 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5212 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5213 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5214 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5215 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5216 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5217 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5218 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5219 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5220 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5221 on the host machine.
5222
5223 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5224 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5225 machine's memory.
5226 @end defmac
5227
5228 @node Uninitialized Data
5229 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5230
5231 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5232 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5233
5234 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5235 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5236 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5237 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5238 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5239 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5240 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5241 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5242 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5243 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5244 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5245 an ordinary undefined external.
5246
5247 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5248 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5249 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5250
5251 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5252 common global variables are output.
5253 @end defmac
5254
5255 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5256 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5257 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5258 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5259 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5260 as the number of bits.
5261 @end defmac
5262
5263 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5264 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5265 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5266 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5267 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5268 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5269 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5270 @end defmac
5271
5272 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5273 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5274 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5275 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5276 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5277
5278 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5279 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5280 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5281 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5282 the name, and a newline.
5283
5284 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5285 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5286 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5287 You do not need to do both.
5288
5289 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5290 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5291 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5292 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5293 common in order to save space in the object file.
5294 @end defmac
5295
5296 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5297 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5298 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5299 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5300 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5301
5302 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5303 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5304 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5305
5306 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5307 static variables are output.
5308 @end defmac
5309
5310 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5311 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5312 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5313 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5314 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5315 as the number of bits.
5316 @end defmac
5317
5318 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5319 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5320 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5321 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5322 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5323 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5324 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5325 @end defmac
5326
5327 @node Label Output
5328 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5329
5330 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5331 This is about outputting labels.
5332
5333 @findex assemble_name
5334 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5335 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5336 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5337 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5338 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5339 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5340 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5341 @end defmac
5342
5343 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5344 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5345 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5346 a function.
5347 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5348 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5349 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5350 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5351
5352 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5353 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5354 @end defmac
5355
5356 @findex assemble_name_raw
5357 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5358 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5359 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5360 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5361 that it is more efficient.
5362 @end defmac
5363
5364 @defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
5365 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5366 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5367 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5368 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5369
5370 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5371 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5372 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5373 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5374 define this macro.
5375 @end defmac
5376
5377 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5378 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5379 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5380 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5381 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5382 provided.
5383 @end defmac
5384
5385 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5386 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5387 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5388 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5389 address.
5390
5391 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5392 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5393 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5394 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5395 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5396 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5397 @end defmac
5398
5399 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5400 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5401 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5402 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5403 @samp{.} is used instead.
5404 @end defmac
5405
5406 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5407 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5408 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5409 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5410 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5411 @end defmac
5412
5413 @defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
5414 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5415 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5416 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5417 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5418
5419 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5420 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5421 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5422 types at all, do not define this macro.
5423 @end defmac
5424
5425 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5426 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5427 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5428 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5429 the default is not to define this macro.
5430
5431 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5432 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5433 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5434 types at all, do not define this macro.
5435 @end defmac
5436
5437 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5438 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5439 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5440 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5441 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5442 you should not count on this.
5443
5444 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5445 definition of this macro is provided.
5446 @end defmac
5447
5448 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5449 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5450 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5451 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5452 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5453 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5454 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5455
5456 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5457 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5458
5459 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5460 of this macro.
5461 @end defmac
5462
5463 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5464 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5465 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5466 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5467 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5468 representing the function.
5469
5470 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5471
5472 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5473 of this macro.
5474 @end defmac
5475
5476 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5477 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5478 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5479 cold function partition which is being defined. This macro is responsible
5480 for outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5481 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5482 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5483
5484 If this macro is not defined, then the cold partition name is defined in the
5485 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5486
5487 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5488 of this macro.
5489 @end defmac
5490
5491 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5492 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5493 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a cold function
5494 partition which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5495 cold partition of the function. The argument @var{decl} is the
5496 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5497
5498 If this macro is not defined, then the partition size is not defined.
5499
5500 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5501 of this macro.
5502 @end defmac
5503
5504 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5505 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5506 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5507 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5508 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5509 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5510
5511 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5512 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5513
5514 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5515 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5516 @end defmac
5517
5518 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5519
5520 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5521 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5522 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5523 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5524
5525 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5526 nothing.
5527 @end defmac
5528
5529 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5530 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5531 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5532 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5533 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5534 something about the size of the object.
5535
5536 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5537 nothing.
5538
5539 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5540 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5541 @end defmac
5542
5543 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5544
5545 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5546
5547 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_UNDEFINED_DECL
5548
5549 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5550 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5551 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5552 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5553 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5554 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5555 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5556 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5557
5558 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5559 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5560 macro.
5561 @end defmac
5562
5563 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5564 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5565 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5566 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5567 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5568 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5569 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5570 to make @var{name} weak.
5571 @end defmac
5572
5573 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5574 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5575 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5576 declaration of @code{name}.
5577 @end defmac
5578
5579 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5580 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5581 supports weak symbols.
5582
5583 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5584 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5585 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5586 @end defmac
5587
5588 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5589 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5590
5591 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5592 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5593 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5594 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5595 @end defmac
5596
5597 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5598 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5599 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5600 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5601 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5602 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5603 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5604 @end defmac
5605
5606 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5607 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5608 semantics.
5609
5610 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5611 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5612 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5613 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5614 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5615 be emitted as one-only.
5616 @end defmac
5617
5618 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5619
5620 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5621 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5622 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5623 The default is @code{0}.
5624
5625 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5626 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5627 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5628 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5629 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5630 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5631 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5632
5633 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5634 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5635 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5636 table of contents.
5637 @end defmac
5638
5639 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5640 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5641 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5642 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5643 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5644 declaration.
5645
5646 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5647 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5648 @end defmac
5649
5650 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5651
5652 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5653
5654 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5655 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5656 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5657 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5658 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5659 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5660 @end defmac
5661
5662 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5663
5664 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5665 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5666 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5667 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5668 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5669 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5670 @end defmac
5671
5672 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5673 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5674 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5675 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5676 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5677 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5678 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5679 being taken.
5680 @end defmac
5681
5682 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5683
5684 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5685 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5686 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5687 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5688 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5689 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5690 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5691 bundles.
5692
5693 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5694 used.
5695 @end defmac
5696
5697 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5698 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5699 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5700
5701 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5702 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5703 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5704
5705 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5706 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5707 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5708 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5709 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5710 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5711 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5712 @end defmac
5713
5714 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5715 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5716 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5717 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5718 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5719
5720 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5721 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5722 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5723 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5724 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5725 internal static variables in different scopes.
5726
5727 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5728 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5729 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5730 between the name and the number will suffice.
5731
5732 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5733 which is correct for most systems.
5734 @end defmac
5735
5736 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5737 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5738 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5739
5740 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5741 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5742 correct for most systems.
5743 @end defmac
5744
5745 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5746 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5747 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5748 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5749 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5750 the tree nodes are available.
5751
5752 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5753 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5754 correct for most systems.
5755 @end defmac
5756
5757 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5758 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5759 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5760 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5761 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5762 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5763 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5764 @end defmac
5765
5766 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5767 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5768 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5769 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5770 an undefined weak symbol.
5771
5772 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5773 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5774 @end defmac
5775
5776 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5777 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5778 Objective-C methods.
5779
5780 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5781 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5782 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5783 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5784
5785 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5786 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5787 systems define other ways of computing names.
5788
5789 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5790 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5791 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5792 50 characters extra.
5793
5794 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5795 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5796 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5797 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5798
5799 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5800 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5801 @end defmac
5802
5803 @node Initialization
5804 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5805 @cindex initialization routines
5806 @cindex termination routines
5807 @cindex constructors, output of
5808 @cindex destructors, output of
5809
5810 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5811 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5812 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5813 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5814 @code{main} is called.
5815
5816 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5817 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5818 terminates.
5819
5820 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5821 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5822 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5823 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5824
5825 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5826 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5827 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5828
5829 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5830 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5831 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5832 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5833 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5834
5835 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5836 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5837 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5838 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5839 pointer containing zero.
5840
5841 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5842 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5843 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5844 list; destructors in forward order.
5845
5846 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5847 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5848 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5849 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5850 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5851 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5852 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5853 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5854
5855 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
5856 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
5857 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
5858 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5859 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
5860
5861 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5862 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5863 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
5864 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5865 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
5866
5867 @smallexample
5868 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
5869 @end smallexample
5870
5871 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
5872 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
5873 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
5874 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
5875 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
5876
5877 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
5878 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
5879 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
5880 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
5881 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
5882 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
5883
5884 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5885 macro properly.
5886
5887 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
5888 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
5889 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
5890 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5891 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
5892 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
5893
5894 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5895 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5896 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5897 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5898 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5899 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5900 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5901 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5902 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5903 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5904 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5905 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5906 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5907 the initialization process.
5908
5909 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5910 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5911 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
5912 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
5913 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
5914 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
5915 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
5916 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
5917 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
5918 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
5919 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
5920
5921 @ifinfo
5922 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
5923 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
5924 @end ifinfo
5925
5926 @node Macros for Initialization
5927 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
5928
5929 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
5930 and termination functions:
5931
5932 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5933 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
5934 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
5935 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
5936 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
5937 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
5938 run the initialization functions.
5939 @end defmac
5940
5941 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
5942 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
5943 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
5944 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
5945 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5946 @end defmac
5947
5948 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
5949 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5950 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
5951 @end defmac
5952
5953 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
5954 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5955 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
5956 @end defmac
5957
5958 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
5959 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
5960 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
5961 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
5962 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
5963 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
5964
5965 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
5966 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
5967 exception tables embedded in the code.
5968 @end defmac
5969
5970 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
5971 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
5972 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
5973 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
5974 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
5975 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
5976 @end defmac
5977
5978 @defmac INVOKE__main
5979 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
5980 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
5981 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
5982 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
5983 @end defmac
5984
5985 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
5986 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
5987 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
5988 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
5989 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
5990 @end defmac
5991
5992 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
5993
5994 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
5995
5996 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
5997
5998 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
5999 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6000
6001 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6002 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6003 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6004
6005 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6006 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6007
6008 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6009 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6010 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6011 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6012
6013 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6014 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6015 @end defmac
6016
6017 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6018 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6019 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6020 @command{nm}.
6021 @end defmac
6022
6023 @defmac NM_FLAGS
6024 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6025 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6026 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6027 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6028 produces.
6029 @end defmac
6030
6031 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6032 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6033 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6034 termination functions in shared libraries:
6035
6036 @defmac LDD_SUFFIX
6037 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6038 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6039 @end defmac
6040
6041 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6042 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6043 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6044 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6045 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6046 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6047 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6048 @end defmac
6049
6050 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6051 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6052 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6053 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6054 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6055 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6056 @end defmac
6057
6058 @node Instruction Output
6059 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6060
6061 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6062 This describes assembler instruction output.
6063
6064 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6065 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6066 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6067 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6068 @end defmac
6069
6070 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6071 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6072 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6073 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6074 to registers using alternate names.
6075 @end defmac
6076
6077 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6078 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6079 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6080 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6081 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6082 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6083 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6084 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6085
6086 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6087 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6088 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6089 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6090 ``s0'' and ``s1''.
6091 @end defmac
6092
6093 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6094 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6095 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6096
6097 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6098 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6099 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6100 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6101 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6102 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6103 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6104 so that it will not be output twice.
6105
6106 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6107 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6108 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6109 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6110 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6111
6112 @findex recog_data.operand
6113 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6114 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6115
6116 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6117 in the usual way.
6118 @end defmac
6119
6120 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6121 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6122 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6123 they will be output differently.
6124
6125 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6126 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6127 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6128 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6129 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6130 by changing the contents of the vector.
6131
6132 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6133 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6134 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6135 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6136 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6137 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6138
6139 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6140 @end defmac
6141
6142 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6143
6144 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6145 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6146 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6147 RTL expression.
6148
6149 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6150 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6151 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6152 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6153 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6154 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6155 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6156
6157 @findex reg_names
6158 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6159 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6160 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6161 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6162
6163 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6164 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6165 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6166 @var{code}.
6167 @end defmac
6168
6169 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6170 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6171 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6172 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6173 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6174 in this way.
6175 @end defmac
6176
6177 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6178 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6179 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6180 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6181
6182 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6183 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6184 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6185 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6186 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6187 Format}.
6188 @end defmac
6189
6190 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6191 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6192 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6193 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6194 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6195 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6196 or whatever.
6197
6198 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6199 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6200 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6201 @end defmac
6202
6203 @findex final_sequence
6204 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6205 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6206 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6207 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6208 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6209 being output.
6210
6211 @findex asm_fprintf
6212 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6213 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6214 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6215 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6216 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6217 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6218 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6219 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6220 files can define these macros differently.
6221 @end defmac
6222
6223 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6224 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6225 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6226 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6227 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6228 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6229 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6230 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6231 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6232 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6233 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6234 @end defmac
6235
6236 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6237 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6238 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6239 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6240 first variant.
6241
6242 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6243 @smallexample
6244 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6245 @end smallexample
6246 @noindent
6247 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6248 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6249 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6250 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6251 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6252 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6253 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6254 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6255 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6256
6257 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6258 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6259 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6260
6261 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6262 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6263 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6264 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6265 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6266 opcodes or operand order.
6267 @end defmac
6268
6269 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6270 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6271 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6272 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6273 profiling.
6274 @end defmac
6275
6276 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6277 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6278 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6279 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6280 profiling.
6281 @end defmac
6282
6283 @node Dispatch Tables
6284 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6285
6286 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6287 This concerns dispatch tables.
6288
6289 @cindex dispatch table
6290 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6291 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6292 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6293 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6294 definitions of these labels are output using
6295 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6296 way here. For example,
6297
6298 @smallexample
6299 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6300 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6301 @end smallexample
6302
6303 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6304 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6305 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6306 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6307 mode and flags can be read.
6308 @end defmac
6309
6310 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6311 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6312 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6313
6314 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6315 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6316 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6317 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6318 For example,
6319
6320 @smallexample
6321 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6322 @end smallexample
6323 @end defmac
6324
6325 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6326 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6327 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6328 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6329 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6330 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6331
6332 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6333 for the table.
6334
6335 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6336 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6337 @end defmac
6338
6339 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6340 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6341 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6342 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6343 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6344 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6345 of the preceding label.
6346
6347 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6348 the jump-table.
6349 @end defmac
6350
6351 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6352
6353 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6354
6355 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6356
6357 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6358
6359 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6360
6361 @node Exception Region Output
6362 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6363
6364 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6365
6366 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6367 region.
6368
6369 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6370 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6371 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6372 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6373 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6374
6375 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6376 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6377 @end defmac
6378
6379 @defmac EH_FRAME_THROUGH_COLLECT2
6380 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will identified by
6381 specially named labels. The collect2 process will locate these
6382 labels and generate code to register the frames.
6383
6384 This might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker will not
6385 place the eh_frames in-between the sentinals from @file{crtstuff.c},
6386 or if the system linker does garbage collection and sections cannot
6387 be marked as not to be collected.
6388 @end defmac
6389
6390 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6391 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6392 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6393 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6394 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6395 @end defmac
6396
6397 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6398 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6399 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6400 @end defmac
6401
6402 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6403 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6404 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6405 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6406 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6407 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6408 @end defmac
6409
6410 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6411 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6412 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6413 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6414 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6415 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6416 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6417
6418 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6419 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6420 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6421
6422 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6423 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6424 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6425 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6426 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6427 depending on this setting.
6428
6429 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6430 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6431 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6432 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6433 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6434 @end deftypefn
6435
6436 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6437 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6438 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6439 command-line option processing.
6440 @end deftypevr
6441
6442 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6443 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6444 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6445 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6446 @end defmac
6447
6448 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6449 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6450 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6451 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6452 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6453 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6454 @end defmac
6455
6456 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6457 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6458 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6459 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6460 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is true, and the positive
6461 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{DWARF}. Only applicable if
6462 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6463 @end defmac
6464
6465 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6466
6467 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6468
6469 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6470
6471 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6472
6473 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6474
6475 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6476
6477 @node Alignment Output
6478 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6479
6480 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6481 This describes commands for alignment.
6482
6483 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6484 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6485 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6486
6487 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6488 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6489 define the macro.
6490
6491 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6492 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6493 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6494 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6495 @end defmac
6496
6497 @hook TARGET_ASM_JUMP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6498
6499 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6500 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6501 a @code{BARRIER}.
6502
6503 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6504 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6505 define the macro.
6506 @end defmac
6507
6508 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6509
6510 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6511 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6512 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6513
6514 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6515 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6516 define the macro.
6517
6518 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6519 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6520 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6521 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6522 @end defmac
6523
6524 @hook TARGET_ASM_LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6525
6526 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6527 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6528 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6529 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6530
6531 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6532 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6533 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6534 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6535 @end defmac
6536
6537 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6538
6539 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6540 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6541 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6542 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6543 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6544 @end defmac
6545
6546 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6547 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6548 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6549 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6550 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6551 section.
6552 @end defmac
6553
6554 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6555 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6556 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6557 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6558 @end defmac
6559
6560 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6561 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6562 for padding, if necessary.
6563 @end defmac
6564
6565 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6566 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6567 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6568 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6569 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6570 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6571 @end defmac
6572
6573 @need 3000
6574 @node Debugging Info
6575 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6576
6577 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6578 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6579
6580 @menu
6581 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6582 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6583 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6584 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6585 * DWARF:: Macros for DWARF format.
6586 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6587 @end menu
6588
6589 @node All Debuggers
6590 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6591
6592 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6593 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6594
6595 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6596 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6597 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6598 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6599 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6600 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6601 compiler and another for DBX@.
6602
6603 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6604 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6605 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6606 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6607 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6608
6609 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6610 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6611 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6612 @end defmac
6613
6614 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6615 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6616 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6617 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6618 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6619 that produce debugging output for DBX and allow the frame-pointer to be
6620 eliminated when the @option{-g} option is used.
6621 @end defmac
6622
6623 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6624 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6625 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6626 @var{offset}.
6627 @end defmac
6628
6629 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6630 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6631 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6632 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6633 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6634 @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG},
6635 and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6636
6637 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6638 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6639 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6640 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6641 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6642
6643 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6644 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6645 @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6646 @end defmac
6647
6648 @node DBX Options
6649 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6650
6651 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6652 These are specific options for DBX output.
6653
6654 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6655 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6656 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6657 @end defmac
6658
6659 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6660 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6661 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6662 @end defmac
6663
6664 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6665 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6666 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6667 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6668 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6669 if there is any occasion to.
6670 @end defmac
6671
6672 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6673 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6674 in the text section.
6675 @end defmac
6676
6677 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6678 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6679 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6680 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6681 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6682 @end defmac
6683
6684 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6685 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6686 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6687 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6688 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6689 information format.
6690 @end defmac
6691
6692 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6693 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6694 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6695 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6696 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6697 @end defmac
6698
6699 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6700 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6701 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6702 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6703 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6704 @end defmac
6705
6706 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6707 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6708 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6709 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6710 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6711 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6712 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6713 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6714 @end defmac
6715
6716 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6717 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6718 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6719 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6720 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6721 if backslash is correct for your system.
6722 @end defmac
6723
6724 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6725 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6726 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6727 variable.
6728 @end defmac
6729
6730 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6731 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6732 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6733 @end defmac
6734
6735 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6736 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6737 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6738 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6739 @end defmac
6740
6741 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6742 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6743 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6744 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6745 @end defmac
6746
6747 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6748 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6749 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6750 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6751 @end defmac
6752
6753 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6754 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6755 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6756 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6757 code.
6758 @end defmac
6759
6760 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6761 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6762 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6763 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6764 an absolute address.
6765 @end defmac
6766
6767 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6768 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6769 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6770 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6771 @end defmac
6772
6773 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6774 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6775 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6776 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6777 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6778 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6779 number for a type number.
6780 @end defmac
6781
6782 @node DBX Hooks
6783 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6784
6785 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6786 These are hooks for DBX format.
6787
6788 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6789 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6790 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6791 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6792 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6793 unique labels in the assembly output.
6794
6795 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6796 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6797 @end defmac
6798
6799 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6800 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6801 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6802 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6803 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6804 @end defmac
6805
6806 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6807 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6808 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6809 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6810 @end defmac
6811
6812 @node File Names and DBX
6813 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6814
6815 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6816 This describes file names in DBX format.
6817
6818 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6819 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6820 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6821 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6822 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6823
6824 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6825 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6826
6827 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
6828 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
6829 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
6830 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
6831 @end defmac
6832
6833 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6834 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6835 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
6836 the beginning of the file.
6837 @end defmac
6838
6839 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
6840 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6841 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
6842 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
6843 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
6844 @end defmac
6845
6846 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6847 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6848 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
6849 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
6850
6851 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6852 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6853 @end defmac
6854
6855 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6856 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
6857 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
6858 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
6859 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
6860 @end defmac
6861
6862 @need 2000
6863 @node DWARF
6864 @subsection Macros for DWARF Output
6865
6866 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6867 Here are macros for DWARF output.
6868
6869 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6870 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6871 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
6872
6873 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
6874
6875 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6876 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6877 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6878 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6879 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6880 @end defmac
6881
6882 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6883 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
6884 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
6885 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
6886 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
6887 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6888 @end defmac
6889
6890 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
6891
6892 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6893 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
6894 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
6895 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
6896 @end defmac
6897
6898 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
6899
6900 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
6901
6902 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
6903
6904 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
6905
6906 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6907 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6908 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6909 @end defmac
6910
6911 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6912 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6913 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
6914 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
6915 @end defmac
6916
6917 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{offset}, @var{section})
6918 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
6919 section-relative reference to the given @var{label} plus @var{offset}, using
6920 an integer of the given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the
6921 given @var{section}.
6922 @end defmac
6923
6924 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
6925 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
6926 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6927 @end defmac
6928
6929 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DATAREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
6930 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to the
6931 given @var{label} relative to the dbase, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6932 @end defmac
6933
6934 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
6935 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
6936 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
6937 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
6938 is referenced by a function.
6939 @end defmac
6940
6941 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
6942
6943 @need 2000
6944 @node VMS Debug
6945 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
6946
6947 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6948 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
6949
6950 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
6951 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
6952 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
6953 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
6954 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
6955 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
6956 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
6957 @end defmac
6958
6959 @node Floating Point
6960 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
6961 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
6962 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
6963
6964 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
6965 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
6966 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
6967 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
6968 doing the compilation.
6969
6970 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
6971 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
6972 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
6973 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
6974 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
6975 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
6976 target floating point formats are identical.
6977
6978 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
6979 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
6980 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
6981 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
6982
6983 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
6984 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
6985 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
6986 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
6987 quantity.
6988 @end defmac
6989
6990 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
6991 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
6992 @end deftypefn
6993
6994 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
6995 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
6996 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
6997 @end deftypefn
6998
6999 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
7000 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7001 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7002 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7003 defined by the C language for both.
7004 @end deftypefn
7005
7006 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7007 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7008 @end deftypefn
7009
7010 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7011 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7012 @end deftypefn
7013
7014 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7015 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7016 @end deftypefn
7017
7018 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7019 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7020 @end deftypefn
7021
7022 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7023 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7024 @end deftypefn
7025
7026 @node Mode Switching
7027 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7028 @cindex mode switching
7029 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7030
7031 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7032 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7033 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7034
7035 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7036 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7037 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7038 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7039 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7040 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you cannot put this into instruction emitting
7041 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7042
7043 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7044 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7045 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7046 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7047 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7048 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7049 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7050 are optional.
7051 @end defmac
7052
7053 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7054 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7055 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7056 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7057 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7058 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7059 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7060 entity in question.
7061 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7062 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7063 switch is needed / supplied.
7064 @end defmac
7065
7066 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7067
7068 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7069
7070 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7071
7072 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7073
7074 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7075
7076 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7077
7078 @node Target Attributes
7079 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7080 @cindex target attributes
7081 @cindex machine attributes
7082 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7083
7084 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7085 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7086 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7087
7088 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7089
7090 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7091
7092 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7093
7094 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7095
7096 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7097
7098 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7099
7100 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7101
7102 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7103 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7104 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7105 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7106 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7107 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7108 on this implementation detail.
7109 @end defmac
7110
7111 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7112
7113 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7114
7115 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7116
7117 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7118
7119 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7120
7121 @hook TARGET_OPTION_POST_STREAM_IN
7122
7123 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7124
7125 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7126
7127 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7128
7129 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7130
7131 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7132
7133 @hook TARGET_RELAYOUT_FUNCTION
7134
7135 @node Emulated TLS
7136 @section Emulating TLS
7137 @cindex Emulated TLS
7138
7139 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7140 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7141 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7142 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7143 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7144 layer.
7145
7146 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7147 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7148 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7149 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7150
7151 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7152
7153 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7154
7155 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7156
7157 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7158
7159 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7160
7161 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7162
7163 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7164
7165 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7166
7167 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7168
7169 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7170
7171 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7172 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7173 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7174
7175 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7176 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7177 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7178 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7179
7180 @smallexample
7181 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7182 unsigned int d;
7183
7184 d = cp0count + 3;
7185 @end smallexample
7186
7187 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7188 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7189 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7190
7191 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7192 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7193 later in the function.
7194
7195 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7196 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7197 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7198
7199 @node PCH Target
7200 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7201 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7202
7203 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7204
7205 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7206
7207 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7208
7209 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7210
7211 @node C++ ABI
7212 @section C++ ABI parameters
7213 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7214
7215 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7216
7217 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7218
7219 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7220
7221 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7222
7223 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7224
7225 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7226
7227 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7228
7229 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7230
7231 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7232
7233 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7234
7235 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7236
7237 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7238
7239 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7240
7241 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7242
7243 @node Named Address Spaces
7244 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7245 @cindex named address spaces
7246
7247 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7248 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7249 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7250 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7251 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7252 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7253 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7254 @code{const} type attributes.
7255
7256 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7257 pointers to the generic address space.
7258
7259 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7260 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7261 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7262 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7263 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7264 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7265 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7266 always 32 bits).
7267
7268 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7269 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7270 address space.
7271
7272 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7273 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7274 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7275 named address space #1:
7276 @smallexample
7277 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7278 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7279 @end smallexample
7280
7281 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7282
7283 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7284
7285 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7286
7287 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7288
7289 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7290
7291 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7292
7293 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ZERO_ADDRESS_VALID
7294
7295 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7296
7297 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DEBUG
7298
7299 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DIAGNOSE_USAGE
7300
7301 @node Misc
7302 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7303 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7304
7305 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7306 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7307
7308 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7309 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7310 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7311 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7312 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7313 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7314 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7315 @end defmac
7316
7317 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7318 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7319 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7320 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7321 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7322 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7323 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7324 @end defmac
7325
7326 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7327 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7328 elements of a jump-table should have.
7329 @end defmac
7330
7331 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7332 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7333 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7334 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7335 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7336 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7337 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7338 flags can be updated.
7339 @end defmac
7340
7341 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7342 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7343 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7344 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7345 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7346 is in effect.
7347 @end defmac
7348
7349 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7350
7351 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7352 Define this macro to 1 if operations between registers with integral mode
7353 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7354 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7355 @end defmac
7356
7357 @hook TARGET_MIN_ARITHMETIC_PRECISION
7358
7359 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7360 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7361 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7362 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7363 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7364 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7365 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7366 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7367
7368 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7369 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7370 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7371 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7372 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7373
7374 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7375 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7376 of these hard registers @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns false
7377 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7378 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7379
7380 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7381 mode, @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7382 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7383 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7384 @end defmac
7385
7386 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7387 Define this macro to 1 if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7388 extends.
7389 @end defmac
7390
7391 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7392
7393 @defmac MOVE_MAX
7394 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7395 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7396 @end defmac
7397
7398 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7399 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7400 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7401 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7402 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7403 at run-time.
7404 @end defmac
7405
7406 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7407 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7408 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7409 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7410 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7411 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7412 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7413 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7414 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7415 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7416 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7417
7418 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7419 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7420 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7421
7422 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7423 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7424 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7425 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7426 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7427
7428 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7429 @end defmac
7430
7431 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7432 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7433
7434 @hook TARGET_TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7435
7436 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7437
7438 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7439 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7440 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7441 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7442 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7443 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7444
7445 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7446 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7447 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7448 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7449 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7450 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7451 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7452 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7453 the compiler.
7454
7455 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7456 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7457 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7458 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7459 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7460 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7461 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7462 expression
7463
7464 @smallexample
7465 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7466 @end smallexample
7467
7468 @noindent
7469 can be converted to
7470
7471 @smallexample
7472 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7473 @end smallexample
7474
7475 @noindent
7476 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7477 tested into the sign bit.
7478
7479 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7480 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7481 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7482 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7483 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7484 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7485
7486 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7487 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7488 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7489 to be used:
7490
7491 @itemize @bullet
7492 @item
7493 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7494 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7495 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7496 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7497 combine the normalization with other operations.
7498
7499 @item
7500 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7501 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7502 other machines.
7503
7504 @item
7505 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7506 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7507 others.
7508
7509 @item
7510 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7511 @end itemize
7512
7513 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7514 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7515 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7516 those cases, e.g., one matching
7517
7518 @smallexample
7519 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7520 @end smallexample
7521
7522 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7523 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7524 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7525 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7526 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7527 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7528 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7529 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7530
7531 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7532 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7533 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7534 @end defmac
7535
7536 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7537 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7538 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7539 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7540 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7541 this macro.
7542 @end defmac
7543
7544 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7545 A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
7546 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7547 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7548 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7549 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7550 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7551 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7552 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7553 given mode.
7554 @end defmac
7555
7556 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7557 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7558 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7559 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7560 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7561 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7562 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7563 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7564 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7565 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7566 this value.
7567
7568 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7569 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7570
7571 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7572 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7573 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7574 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7575
7576 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7577 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7578 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7579 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7580 breaking the API@.
7581 @end defmac
7582
7583 @defmac Pmode
7584 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7585 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7586 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7587 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7588 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7589
7590 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7591 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7592 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7593 to @code{Pmode}.
7594 @end defmac
7595
7596 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7597 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7598 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7599 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7600 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7601 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7602 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7603 @end defmac
7604
7605 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7606 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7607 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7608 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7609 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7610 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7611
7612 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7613 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7614 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7615 @end defmac
7616
7617 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7618
7619 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7620
7621 @defmac NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7622 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C@.
7623 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7624 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7625 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7626 @end defmac
7627
7628 @findex #pragma
7629 @findex pragma
7630 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7631 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7632 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7633 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7634 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7635 setup required for the pragmas.
7636
7637 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7638 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7639 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7640
7641 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7642 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7643
7644 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7645 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7646 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7647 @end defmac
7648
7649 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7650 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7651
7652 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7653 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7654 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7655 pragma of the form
7656
7657 @smallexample
7658 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7659 @end smallexample
7660
7661 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7662 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7663 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7664 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7665 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7666 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7667 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7668 arguments of pragmas registered with
7669 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7670 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7671
7672 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7673 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7674 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7675 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7676 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7677 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7678 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7679 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7680 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7681 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7682 how to build this object file.
7683 @end deftypefun
7684
7685 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7686 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7687 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7688 @end defmac
7689
7690 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7691 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7692 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7693 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7694 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7695 @end defmac
7696
7697 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7698 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7699 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7700 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7701 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7702 @end defmac
7703
7704 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7705 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7706 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7707 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7708 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7709 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7710 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7711 you should define this macro.
7712
7713 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7714 @end defmac
7715
7716 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7717 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7718 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7719 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7720 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7721 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7722 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7723 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7724 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7725 slot of @var{insn}.
7726
7727 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7728 @end defmac
7729
7730 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7731 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7732 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7733 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7734 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7735 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7736
7737 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7738 @end defmac
7739
7740 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_ADJUST
7741
7742 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7743 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7744 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7745 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7746 separate math library.
7747
7748 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7749 @end defmac
7750
7751 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7752 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7753 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7754
7755 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7756 is wrong.
7757 @end defmac
7758
7759 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7760 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7761 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7762 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7763 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7764 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
7765 for cross-profiling.
7766 @end defmac
7767
7768 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7769
7770 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7771 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7772 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
7773 1 if it does use cc0.
7774 @end defmac
7775
7776 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7777 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
7778 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
7779 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
7780 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
7781 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
7782 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
7783 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
7784 @end defmac
7785
7786 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7787 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
7788 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
7789 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
7790 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
7791 @end defmac
7792
7793 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
7794 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
7795 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
7796 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
7797 about the currently processed blocks.
7798 @end defmac
7799
7800 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
7801 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
7802 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7803 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7804 to by @var{ce_info}.
7805 @end defmac
7806
7807 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
7808 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
7809 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7810 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7811 to by @var{ce_info}.
7812 @end defmac
7813
7814 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
7815 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
7816 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7817 to by @var{ce_info}.
7818 @end defmac
7819
7820 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7821
7822 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
7823
7824 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
7825
7826 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
7827
7828 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_CHKP_FUNCTION
7829 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_TYPE
7830 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_MODE
7831 @hook TARGET_CHKP_MAKE_BOUNDS_CONSTANT
7832 @hook TARGET_CHKP_INITIALIZE_BOUNDS
7833
7834 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
7835
7836 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
7837
7838 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
7839
7840 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
7841
7842 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
7843
7844 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
7845
7846 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
7847
7848 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
7849
7850 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
7851
7852 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
7853
7854 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
7855
7856 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
7857
7858 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
7859
7860 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
7861
7862 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
7863 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
7864 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
7865 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
7866 @end defmac
7867
7868 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
7869 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
7870 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
7871 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
7872 executable files.
7873 @end defmac
7874
7875 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
7876 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
7877 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
7878 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
7879 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
7880 lists.
7881 @end defmac
7882
7883 @defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
7884 Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
7885 method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
7886 must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
7887 For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
7888 the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
7889 defined as this expression:
7890
7891 @smallexample
7892 build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
7893 build_tree_list
7894 (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
7895 NULL))
7896 @end smallexample
7897 @end defmac
7898
7899 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
7900
7901 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS
7902
7903 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED
7904
7905 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
7906
7907 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_FIRST
7908
7909 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_NEXT
7910
7911 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
7912
7913 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
7914 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
7915 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
7916 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
7917 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
7918 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
7919 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
7920 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
7921 @end defmac
7922
7923 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
7924 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
7925 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
7926 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
7927 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
7928 @end deftypefn
7929
7930 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
7931 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
7932 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
7933 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
7934 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
7935 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
7936 @end deftypefn
7937
7938 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
7939 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
7940 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
7941 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
7942 that are different from @option{-I}.
7943 @end deftypefn
7944
7945 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
7946 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
7947 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
7948 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
7949 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
7950 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
7951 @end defmac
7952
7953 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
7954 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
7955 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
7956 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
7957 @end defmac
7958
7959 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
7960 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
7961 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
7962 @end defmac
7963
7964 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
7965 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
7966 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
7967 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
7968 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
7969 @end defmac
7970
7971 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
7972 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
7973 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
7974 @end defmac
7975
7976 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
7977 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
7978 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
7979 and scanf formatter settings.
7980 @end defmac
7981
7982 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
7983
7984 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
7985
7986 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
7987
7988 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
7989
7990 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
7991
7992 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
7993
7994 @defmac OBJC_JBLEN
7995 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
7996 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
7997 @end defmac
7998
7999 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8000 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8001 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8002 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8003 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8004 @end defmac
8005
8006 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8007
8008 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8009
8010 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8011
8012 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8013
8014 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8015
8016 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8017
8018 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8019
8020 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8021
8022 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8023
8024 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8025
8026 @hook TARGET_RECORD_OFFLOAD_SYMBOL
8027
8028 @hook TARGET_OFFLOAD_OPTIONS
8029
8030 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8031
8032 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8033 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8034 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8035 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8036 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8037 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8038 representation.
8039
8040 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8041 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8042 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8043 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8044 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8045
8046 @itemize @bullet
8047 @item
8048 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8049 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8050 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8051
8052 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8053 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8054 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8055 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8056 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8057 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8058 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8059 not really a large change.
8060
8061 @item
8062 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8063 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8064 port in this code.
8065
8066 @item
8067 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8068 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8069 @end itemize
8070
8071 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8072 maintainer is familiar with.
8073
8074 @end defmac
8075
8076 @hook TARGET_RUN_TARGET_SELFTESTS